Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 387

OPERATING MANUAL

UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Safety warning and liability

Chemicals used as reagent or as used as cleaning solution or used to prepare calibration


solutions might be toxic, corrosive or irritant. Refer to the material safety data sheets (MSDS) for
each chemical. Wear protection glass and gloves.

To prevent electric shock:

- Connect this instrument only at a properly grounded


power socket

- Unplug the power cord before any servicing,


wiring or any operation inside the instrument

- Keep the door locked by the key

The documentation and/or Product are provided on an “as is”


basis only and may contain deficiencies or inadequacies. The
Documentation and/or Product are provided without warranty of
any kind, express or implied.

The manufacturer or its suppliers shall, regardless of any legal


theory upon which the claim is based, not be liable for any
consequential, incidental, direct, indirect, punitive or other
damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, damages for
loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business
information or data, or other pecuniary loss) arising out the use of
or inability to use the Documentation and/or Product, even if the
manufacturer or its suppliers has been advised of the possibility of
such damages.

Release A Page 2 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Contents

1 Quick start …………………..………………………………………………… 8

2 Installation …………………………………………….…….………………… 10

2.1 Fixing …………………………………………………………………… 10


2.2 Hydraulic connections …………………………….………………….. 11
2.3 Flow diagrams ……….………………….……………………………... 12
2.4 Electrical connections ……….………………….…………………….. 15

2.4.1 4-20 mA output ….……………………………………………… 16


2.4.2 Wi-Fi ….…….…….……………………………………………… 17
2.4.3 Ethernet …………..……………………………………………… 18
2.4.4 RS232 ….…….………………………………….……..………… 19
2.4.5 RS485 …………………………………………….……………… 20
2.4.6 pH probe .…….…….………………………………………….… 21
2.4.7 Conductivity probe ……………………………………………… 21
2.4.8 4-20 mA input …………………………………………………… 22
2.4.9 Relay module …………………………………………………… 22
2.4.10 Logical input …………………………………………………… 23
2.4.11 Mains ….…….…………………………………………..……… 24
2.4.12 USB ….…….………..…………………………………..……… 24

3 Operating …………………………………………….……...………………… 25

3.1 Overview ……………………………………………………………….. 25


3.2 Screens overview ……………………………………………………… 25
3.3 Process screen ………………………………………………………… 26
3.4 Alarm screen …………………………………………………………… 31
3.5 Timing screen …………………………………………………….….… 35
3.6 Communication screen ………………………………………………. 43
3.7 Regional setting screen ………………………………………………. 52
3.8 Factory screen ………………………………………….……………… 55

4 Principle, test and recalibration ………………….……...………………… 61

4.1 Ammoniac
4.1.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 61
4.1.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 62
4.1.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 74

4.2 Chlorophyll A
4.2.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 76
4.2.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 76

Release A Page 3 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.2.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 86

4.3 Colour by LED


4.3.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 87
4.3.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 88
4.3.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 98

4.4 Colour by spectrograph


4.4.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 99
4.4.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 100
4.4.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 110

4.5 Conductivity
4.5.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 111
4.5.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 112
4.5.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 120

4.6 Dissolved oxygen


4.6.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 121
4.6.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 122
4.6.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 130

4.7 Hydrocarbons
4.7.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 131
4.7.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 132
4.7.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 142

4.8 Hydrogen sulphide


4.8.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 143
4.8.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 144
4.8.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 155

4.9 Input 4-20 mA


4.9.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 156
4.9.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 156
4.9.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 164

4.10 Nitrate by filter


4.10.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 165
4.10.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 166

Release A Page 4 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.10.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 175

4.11 Nitrate by spectrograph


4.11.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 176
4.11.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 177
4.11.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 187

4.12 Oxidation-reduction potential


4.12.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 188
4.12.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 189
4.12.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 197

4.13 pH
4.13.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 198
4.13.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 199
4.13.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 207

4.14 Phosphate by LED


4.14.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 208
4.14.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 209
4.14.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 220

4.15 Phosphate by spectrograph


4.15.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 221
4.15.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 222
4.15.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 233

4.16 Rhodamine
4.16.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 234
4.16.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 235
4.16.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 245

4.17 Spectrum UV-VIS


4.17.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 246
4.17.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 247

4.18 Temperature
4.18.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 253
4.18.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 254
4.18.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 262

Release A Page 5 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.19 Turbidity by UV absorption with filter


4.19.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 263
4.19.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 264
4.19.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 272

4.20 Turbidity by UV absorption with spectrograph


4.20.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 273
4.20.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 274
4.20.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 283

4.21 Turbidity by nephelometry


4.21.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 284
4.21.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 285
4.21.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 293

4.22 UV254 by filter


4.22.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 294
4.22.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 295
4.22.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 304

4.23 UV254 by spectrograph


4.23.1 Principle …………………………………………………………. 305
4.23.2 Test ………………………………………………………………. 306
4.23.3. Recalibration ……………………………………………………. 317

5 Maintenance, troubleshooting and measuring errors ...……………… 318

5.1 General ………………………………………………..……….………… 318


5.2 Ammoniac ....................................................................................... 319
5.3 Chlorophyll A ...……………………………….……….……………...… 321
5.4 Colour by LED ….……………………………….….………..………… 323
5.5 Colour by spectrograph ………………………………………………. 326
5.6 Conductivity ……………………………………………..……………… 328
5.7 Dissolved oxygen …………………………………………….………… 329
5.8 Hydrocarbons …………………………………………………………… 330
5.9 Hydrogen sulphide ………………………….…………….…………… 332
5.10 Input 4-20 mA ……….……………………….…………….….………… 334
5.11 Nitrate by filter …………..……………………………………………… 335
5.12 Nitrate by spectrograph ...……………………………………………… 338

Release A Page 6 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.13 Oxidation-reduction potential ………………….……………….……… 340


5.14 pH ……………………………..………………….……………….……… 341
5.15 Phosphate by LED ...…………………………………………….……… 342
5.16 Phosphate by spectrograph ...………………………………….……… 345
5.17 Rhodamine …………………………………….………………………… 347
5.18 Spectrum UV-VIS …………………………….……………………….… 349
5.19 Temperature …………………..………………………………………… 350
5.20 Turbidity by UV absorption with filter ……………………..………….. 351
5.21 Turbidity by UV absorption with spectrograph ……………...……….. 354
5.22 Turbidity by nephelometry …………………………………….……….. 356
5.23 UV254 by filter …….……….……………………………….…………… 358
5.24 UV254 by spectrograph ………………………………………………… 361

6 Specifications .......................................................................................... 363

6.1 General ………………………………………………..……….………… 363


6.2 Ammoniac ………………………………………..…………….….…… 365
6.3 Chlorophyll A ...……………………………….……………………...… 366
6.4 Colour by LED ….……………………………….….………..………… 367
6.5 Colour by spectrograph ………………………………………………. 368
6.6 Conductivity ……………………………………………..……………… 369
6.7 Dissolved oxygen …………………………………………….………… 370
6.8 Hydrocarbons …………………………………………………………… 371
6.9 Hydrogen sulphide ………………………….…………….…………… 372
6.10 Input 4-20 mA ……….……………………….…………….….………… 373
6.11 Nitrate by filter …………..……………………………….……………… 374
6.12 Nitrate by spectrograph ...……………………………………………… 375
6.13 Oxidation-reduction potential ………………….……………….……… 376
6.14 pH ……………………………..………………….……………….……… 377
6.15 Phosphate by LED ...…………………………………………….……… 378
6.16 Phosphate by spectrograph ...………………………………….……… 379
6.17 Rhodamine …………………………………….………………………… 380
6.18 Spectrum UV-VIS …………………………….……………………….… 381
6.19 Temperature …………………..………………………………………… 382
6.20 Turbidity by UV absorption with filter ……………………..………….. 383
6.21 Turbidity by UV absorption with spectrograph ………….……..…….. 384
6.22 Turbidity by nephelometry …………………………………….……….. 385
6.23 UV254 by filter …….……….……………………………….…………… 386
6.24 UV254 by spectrograph ………………………………………………… 387
---

Release A Page 7 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Quick start

Step 1
Unpack the analyser, check that nothing has been damaged during the transportation and fix it
on a wall. The dimensions are given on chapter 2.

Step 2
Connect the sample inlet and outlet with plastic tubing, ID 6.4 mm (1/4”) OD 9.6 mm (3/8”).
Refer to chapter 2 for inlet and outlet location if necessary.
Assemble the fitting elements as below:

With the peristaltic sampling pump, the inlet pressure must be limited to 1 Bar (equiv.
to 1000 hPa or 15 psi)

Step 3
Depending on the options, refer to chapter 2 to connect the 4-20 mA output or the RS232 cable
or the RS485 cable or the Ethernet cable. If a Wi-Fi link has been chosen as an option, check
that the antenna is properly fixed on the right side of the enclosure.

Step 4
Connect the power cable to a grounded power socket.

To avoid electric shock, the analyser must be connected to the earth via the power
socket.

Step 5
Check that the date and time on the bottom right of the screen are correct. If not, refer to
chapter 3 for setting date and time.

Release A Page 8 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Step 6
Refer to chapter 3 to configure the optional interface (4-20 mA or RS232 or RS485 or Ethernet
or Wi-Fi).

Step 7
The default mode is the stopped mode (no automatic measurements, no automatic cleaning).

Set the measuring mode (continuous, periodic or extern) depending of the application (refer to
chapter no 3, timing screen).

The analyser is factory calibrated and is now ready to start the measurements.

For checking and recalibration, refer to chapter 4 for each individual parameter.

Release A Page 9 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

2 Installation

2.1 Fixing

Make 4 holes in the panel or in the wall for 8 mm diameter screws according to the pattern
below:

Release A Page 10 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

2.2 Hydraulic connections

Refer to the drawing and table below for the hydraulic connections.
Flow diagrams are given on the chapter 2.3 for different measuring configurations.

1 Sample outlet (if NH4 or H2S parameter)


2 Sample Inlet
3 Cleaning solution inlet (H2SO4 5% otherwise specified)
4 NaOH 10% (only if NH4 parameter)
5 HCl 10% (only if H2S parameter)
6 Reagent (for PO4 only)
7 Sample outlet (without NH4 or H2S parameter)
8 Air inlet (if NH4 or H2S parameter)

Release A Page 11 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The sample inlet and outlet must be connected with plastic tubing, ID 6.4 mm (1/4”) OD 9.6 mm
(3/8”).

Reagents or cleaning solution must be connected with plastic tubing, ID 3.2 mm (1/8”) OD 6.4
mm (1/4”)

The double-ring fittings must be assembled on the tubing as shown below:

2.3 Flow diagrams for different configurations

A) All optical measurements except NH4, H2S and PO4

Release A Page 12 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

B) NH4 and/or H2S only

C) NH4 and/or H2S with other optical measurements, except PO4

Release A Page 13 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

D) PO4 only or PO4 with other optical measurement except NH4 and H2S

E) PO4, NH4 and/or H2S and other optical measurements

Release A Page 14 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

2.4 Electrical connections

All the cable must be connected using the glands as show below.

1 USB key connector


2 Glands for inputs/outputs
3 Gland for the power cable

Release A Page 15 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

2.4.1 4-20 mA output (optional)

The module OUT4-20-500 delivers an active 4-20 mA signal for PLC, recorders or SCADA
system. Each OUT4-20-500 module is affected to one measuring channel.

Refer to chapter 3 to set up the 4-20 mA module position and scale values for each channel.

The maximum allowed charge is 500 ohm.

No voltage must be applied on the 4-20 mA output.

The output has a galvanic insulation by optocouplers up to 1 KV DC.

Screw terminal J2

Pin 1 4-20 mA output (+)


Pin 2 4-20 mA output (-)
Note: pin 1 on left side

Max load: 500 Ω

Release A Page 16 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

2.4.2 Wi-Fi port (optional)

The Wi-Fi module follows the IEEE 802.11b standard and is internally connected to a SMA
connector on the right side of the analyser.

The 2.4 GHz antenna must be fixed on this SMA connector as represented below.

Refer to chapter 3 (communications) to enable the Wi-Fi communication and to set up the
network name (SSID) and the WEP key.

The Wi-Fi module follows the standards listed on the table below.

Standards
Emissions AS/NZS 3548
AS/NZS 3548 CISPR 22
Japan IOH
003NY04115 0000
003GZ04064 0000
FCC Part 15 Subpart C
(FCC ID: MCQ-50M880)
IC RSS 210 (IC:1846A-50M880)
FCC Part 15 Subpart B
ICES-003
EN 55022
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-6
EN 301 489-3
EN 300 328
VCCI
Immunity EN 55024
Safety UL 60950-1
CSA 22.2 No. 60950--1
EN 60950

Release A Page 17 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

2.4.3 Ethernet port (optional)

The Ethernet module provide a RJ-45 jack that meets the ISO 8877 requirements for
10/100BASE-T. See the following figure and table for pin orientation and pin assignments.

Refer to chapter 3 (communications) to select the Ethernet port and to set up the IP address
and mask.

The RJ-45 cable must go through the PG16 gland (biggest).

RJ-45 pin assignment

Pin 1 TXD+ Transmit data +


Pin 2 TXD- Transmit data -
Pin 3 RXD+ Receive data +
Pin 4 EPWR+ Power from switch +
Pin 5 EPWR+ Power from switch +
Pin 6 RXD- Receive data +
Pin 7 EPWR- Power from switch -
Pin 8 EPWR- Power from switch -

Release A Page 18 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

2.4.4 RS232 port

The RS232 port has a Sub-D 9 pins male connector and is located on the screen board
DSP500, position J15.

Refer to chapter 3 (communications) to select the communication mode and the baud rate.
The format is always 8 bit, no parity, 1 bit stop.

To connect this port to a laptop (directly or through or a USB adaptor), use a null cable (pin 2 to
pin 3, pin 3 to pin 2, pin 5 to pin 5).

See the following table for pin assignments.

RS232 port – Sub-D9 pin assignment


Pin 1 DCD (unused)
Pin 2 RXD Receive data
Pin 3 TXD Transmit data
Pin 4 DTR (unused)
Pin 5 GND Ground
Pin 6 DSR (unused)
Pin 7 RTS (unused)
Pin 8 CTS (unused)
Pin 9 RI (unused)
Note 1: Pin 4 and 6 are connected together
Note 2: Pin 7 and 8 are connected together

Release A Page 19 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

2.4.5 RS485 port

The RS485 port has a 6-pin screw terminal located on the screen board DSP500, position J16
as shown below:

RS485

Refer to chapter 3 (communications) to select the communication mode and the baud rate.
The format is always 8 bit, no parity, 1 bit stop.

See the following table for pin assignments.


Pin 5 or 6 may be used to connect the RS485 cable shielding.

RS485 port – Pin assignment


Pin 1 RX+ Receive data +
Pin 2 RX- Receive data -
Pin 3 TX+ Transmit data +
Pin 4 TX- Transmit data -
Pin 5 GND Ground
Pin 6 GND Ground
Note: pin 1 on left side

Release A Page 20 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

2.4.6 pH module (optional)

The module PH500 accepts the direct connection of a pH electrode on the screw terminal J2.

For automatic temperature compensation, the Pt100* sensor of the electrode must be
connected on J3.

Note 1: if J3 stay unconnected, the temperature is preset at 25 °C.


Note 2: the maximal recommended length for the cable is 10 meters (30 feet).
(*) platinum resistive element of 100 ohm at 0° C

Screw terminal J2 Screw terminal J3

Pin 1 pH input (+) Pin 1 Pt100 input


Pin 2 pH input (-) Pin 2 Pt100 input

Note: pin 1 on left side Note: pin 1 on left side

2.4.7 Conductivity module (optional)

The module COND500 accepts the direct connection of a conductivity electrode on the screw
terminal J2. Conductivity constant of K=0.01, K=0.1, K=1 and K=10 are accepted, refer to
chapter 4 to setup the right constant.

For automatic temperature compensation, the Pt100* sensor of the electrode must be
connected on J3. Refer to chapter 4 to adjust the temperature coefficient.

Note 1: if J3 stay unconnected, the temperature is preset at 25 °C.


Note 2: the maximal recommended length for the cable is 10 meters (30 feet).
(*) platinum resistive element of 100 ohm at 0° C

Screw terminal J2 Screw terminal J3

Pin 1 Cond. input Pin 1 Pt100 input


Pin 2 Cond. input Pin 2 Pt100 input

Note: pin 1 on left side Note: pin 1 on left side

Release A Page 21 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

2.4.8 4-20 mA input module (optional)

The module IN4-20-500 accepts the connection of a 4-20 mA output from any probe or external
measuring system. The floating input is insulated by optocouplers.

A 15V DC output (insulated, max 20 mA) is available on the connector J3. This output must be
used for any probe with electrical contact to the water sample (example: chlorine probe).

A 12V DC output (non insulated, max 200 mA) is available on the connector J4. Do not use this
output to supply probe with electrical contact to the water sample.

Refer to chapter 4 to set proper label, unit and scale factor of the measuring channel attached to
this module.

Screw terminal J2 Screw terminal J3 Screw terminal J4

Pin 1 4-20 mA Pin 1 +15V Pin 1 +12V


input (+) Pin 2 0V (floating) Pin 2 0V (ground)
Pin 2 4-20 mA Note: pin 1 on left side Note: pin 1 on left side
input (-)
Note: pin 1 on left side
Max current: 20 mA Max current: 200 mA
Input impedance: 100 Ω

2.4.9 Relay module (optional)

The module RELAY500 gives on J2 a normally closed (NC) and a normally open (NO) relay
contacts for different functions. Refer to chapter 4 to select the right function, threshold, etc....

A 24V DC output is available on the screw terminal J3 (total max current 1A). This output can be
used for example to power external pumps or valve for a multiplexing system.

Screw terminal J2 Screw terminal J3


Pin 1 NO contact Pin 1 +24V DC
Pin 2 Common Pin 2 0V (ground)
Pin 3 NC contact Note: pin 1 on left side
Note: pin 1 on left side

Contact rating: Total current max: 1 A


5A @ 277VAC/30VDC resistive

Release A Page 22 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

2.4.10 Logical input module (optional)

The module LOGIC500 accepts two logical signals from a PLC to control the measurement
cycles.

The START input is used to start a measurement cycle for all the channels when a pulse (6 to
48V DC) is received. The minimum pulse width is 200 mS. The external measuring mode must
be selected.

The INHIBIT input is used to stop and inhibit any further automatic measurement (periodic mode
or continuous mode) as long as this input is maintained high (6 to 48 VDC).

Note: as these two input signals refer to different measuring mode, it has no sense to use both
of them on a same application.

Screw terminal J2 Screw terminal J3

Pin 1 Start input (+) Pin 1 Inhibit input (+)


Pin 2 Start input (-) Pin 2 Inhibit input (+)
Note: pin 1 on left side Note: pin 1 on left side

Level: 6 to 48 VDC Level: 6 to 48 VDC


Input impedance: 10 KΩ Input impedance: 10 KΩ

Release A Page 23 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

2.4.11 Mains connection

Before connecting the power cord, check that the voltage written on the serial
number plate corresponds to the mains voltage.

To avoid electric shock, the analyser must be connected to the earth via the power
socket. Check that the power socked is earthed.

Disconnect the power cord or mains before any wiring, connection or maintenance
operation inside the analyser.

If all the conditions above are satisfied, plug the power cord into a grounded power socket.

If the power cord needs to be changed or removed, the mains must be connected to the screen
board DSP500 on the screw terminal J1 as follows:

Neutral
Earth
Line

2.4.12 USB

A USB key (memory stick) can be connected on the USB connector type A represented on the
drawing of the section 2.4 for measurements download, configuration download or upload, or for
upgrading the analyser software. Refer to the Operating section for using the USB key.

Disconnect the USB key as soon as the operation if finished as USB connection is
not watertight.

Release A Page 24 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

3 Operating
3.1 Overview

When powered on, the analyser displays the process screen after a fast hardware check.

Then the measurements start automatically and the process values and graphs are updated as
soon as necessary (except in stopped mode that is the default mode after delivery, see on the
timing screen to change the mode).

3.2 Screens overview

To change of screen, press on one of the following button as shown below.


A login is required on the first time. The default password is 123 in user mode and 456 in
administrator mode.

The timing, communication, regional setting and factory screens are accessible only
in administrator mode.

Process screen

Alarm screen

Timing screen

Communication screen

Regional setting screen

Check screen Factory screen

Release A Page 25 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

3.3 Process screen

The process screen is the basic screen of the analyser. It is display a few seconds after power
on and remains displayed all the time unless another screen has been selected. The default
password for login is 123 in user mode and 456 in administrator mode.

This screen displays the very last measurement for all the active channels on the left side and
the graph of the recorded measurements on the right side.

If the screen saver mode has been selected, the backlight of the screen will be cut automatically
when no key has been activated for 15 minutes or during the night time, depending of the
screen saver mode. All the functions (measurement, cleaning, temperature control...) remain
active during the screen saving time. To reactivate the screen, press anywhere on the screen.

4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12

Release A Page 26 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Label of the measuring channel

The label is automatically set when the channel is created. It can be modified in the check
screen.

2 Unit of the measuring channel

The unit is automatically set when the channel is created. It can be modified in the check
screen.

3 Temperature

Display the auxiliary temperature measurement of the channel. It concerns only the channels
with automatic temperature compensation (NH4, H2S, PO4, PAH, Chl. A, pH and conductivity).

4 Channel value

This value is the very last measurement done for each channel. The number of digit can be
modified in the check screen. By default, negative values resulting from normal measuring
fluctuations or from a wrong zero are displayed. They can be eliminated and replace by zero by
changing a setting on the check screen.

5 Adjustment - checking

This key gives access to the check screen for each channel checking or calibration. Then the
value display area must be pressed to select the right channel.
Alternatively as a shortcut, the value display area can be pressed directly.

6 Graph display or zoom

This key gives access to a full screen zoom of the historical graph. The channel must be
selected by pressing or on the value area or on the graph, depending on the total number of
channels.

7 Recorded measurement graph

Release A Page 27 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

This graph shows the last measurements over the selected time scale. The red dot line
corresponds to the high alarm threshold defined in the alarm screen, while the green dot line
correspond to the low alarm threshold.
The Y scale of the graph is automatic, but cannot be lower than the high threshold. If the high
threshold is not used as an alarm, it can be reduced in order to increase the Y scale for a better
resolution on low measurements.

To view a zoom of the graph, press anywhere on the graph area. Refer to the zoom screen for
more details.

8 Date and time field

This field displays the current date and time. To change the date or the date format, refer to the
regional setting screen.

9 Measurements schedule field

Depending on the measuring mode, this field displays information about the measurements
schedule.

If an inhibit signal is send to the LOGIC500 logical input module (for any mode except the
stopped mode), this field displays “Held” otherwise display will be as follows:

a) For continuous mode, this field displays “Measuring...” followed by the label of the
channel being currently acquired

b) For periodic mode:


- Between measurement cycle, the time remaining for the next measuring cycle is
displayed, example: “Next measurement: 00:03:24” means that the next measuring
cycle will occur in 3 min and 24 sec.

- During sampling time, this field displays “Sampling...”

- During settling down time (if any), this field displays “Settling down...”

- During measurement, the currently measured parameter is displayed, for example:


“Measuring NO3...”

c) For external mode:


- As long as no measuring cycle is engaged, this field displays “Waiting...”

- If a measuring cycle command has been received from the LOGIC500 logical input
module or through MODBUS communication, a measuring cycle starts and the
display is one of the following:

- During sampling time, this field displays “Sampling...”

Release A Page 28 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

- During settling down time (if any), this field displays “Settling down...”

- During measurement, the currently measured parameter is displayed, for


example: “Measuring NO3...”

d) For stopped mode, this field displays “Stopped”.

10 Cleaning schedule field

Depending on the cleaning method, this field displays information about the cleaning schedule.

a) Manual cleaning (automatic cleaning deactivated)

This field displays “No cleaning”.

b) Acid cleaning method

- Between cleaning cycle, the time remaining for the next cleaning cycle is displayed,
example: “Next cleaning: 01:03:24” means that the next cleaning cycle will occur in 1
hours 3 min and 24 sec.

- During purging by acid, the time remaining is displayed, example: “Purging... 00:00:15”
means that purging will continue during 15 sec.

- During the waiting time, the time remaining is displayed, example: “Waiting... 00:00:05”
means that waiting time will continue during 5 sec.

- During zeroing (if any), This field displays “Zeroing...”

- During the recovery time, the time remaining is displayed, example: “Recovery...
00:00:20” means that recovery will continue during 20 sec.

c) Ultrasonic method

- Between cleaning cycle, the time remaining for the next cleaning cycle is displayed,
example: “Next cleaning: 01:03:24” means that the next cleaning cycle will occur in 1
hours 3 min and 24 sec.

- During cleaning by acid, the time remaining is displayed, example: “Cleaning... 00:00:15”
means that cleaning will continue during 15 sec.

- During the recovery time, the time remaining is displayed, example: “Recovery...
00:00:20” means that recovery will continue during 20 sec.

Release A Page 29 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Login / logout statement

An open padlock means that a user is currently logged, should be in user mode or super user
mode. To logout, press on this icon. The analyser automatically logout after 15 minutes without
action on the touch screen.

A close padlock means that the analyser is currently logout. Press anywhere in the touch screen
to start a login procedure.
3.4 Alarm screen

The alarm screen shows for each channel the high and low alarm thresholds including eventual
boundaries as well as the “fault” relay number (if any) and “ready” relay number (if any).

12 Mute mode

This field select or deselect the mute mode. In mute mode, the loudspeaker is bared.

Release A Page 30 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

3.4 Alarm screen

The alarm screen enables to set the high and low alarm threshold, as well as the boundaries.
The relay modules (if any) are displayed as a reminder for the external wiring.

9 10

5 6 7 8

1 Label of the measuring channel

Each measuring channel is listed in the alarm screen. The label can be modified in the check
screen if necessary.

Release A Page 31 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

2 Relay position

The relay position refers to one of the 12 module’s socket positions on the DSP500 main board.
Refer to installation section for socket drawing on the DSP500 board.

Note: this button remains empty if no relay module has been installed (option).

3 High alarm value

The high alarm level can be changed by pressing on this field. A default value is preset when
the channel is created. The high alarm level is primary used to fix the high limit represented by a
red dot line on the recorded measurement graph. The limit is used as the minimum graph scale.

The secondary use is to drive a high alarm relay if the relay button has been activated and if a
relay module has been installed on the selected module socket. In this case, the relay will be
activated as soon as the measurement overpass the high alarm value and will stay activated
until the measurement goes down below this value after subtracting the boundary value.

Refer to installation section for the relay wiring. Both functions NO (Normally Open) and NC
(Normally Closed) are available.

4 ON-OFF test button

This button shows the current position of the optional alarm relay. It can be used to activate or
deactivate the concerned relay for test purpose only. The relay recovers its expected state after
5 seconds or when the alarm screen is left.

Note: this button exists only if a relay has been installed (option).

5 Relay position

The relay position refers to one of the 12 module’s socket positions on the DSP500 main board.
Refer to installation section for socket drawing on the DSP500 board.

Note: this button remains empty if no relay has been installed (option).

6 Low alarm value

The low alarm level can be changed by pressing on this field. A default value is preset when the
channel is created. The low alarm level is primary used to fix the low limit represented by a
green dot line on the recorded measurement graph.

Release A Page 32 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The secondary use is to drive a low alarm relay if the relay button has been activated and if a
relay module has been installed on the selected module socket. In this case, the relay will be
activated as soon as the measurement underpass the low alarm value and will stay activated
until the measurement goes down below this value after adding the boundary value.

Refer to installation section for the relay wiring. Both functions NO (Normally Open) and NC
(Normally Closed) are available.

7 ON-OFF test button

This button shows the current position of the optional alarm relay. It can be used to activate or
deactivate the concerned relay for test purpose only. The relay recovers its expected state after
5 seconds or when the alarm screen is left.

Note: this button exists only if a relay has been installed (option).

8 Boundaries

The purpose of boundary is avoiding too frequent changes of state of the alarm relays what can
harm process devices like pumps or electric-valves. The boundary value is subtracted from the
high level value before leaving the high alarm state and reciprocally added to the low alarm level
before leaving the low alarm state as shown on the example below for the high level only:

1 High alarm value


2 High alarm value - boundary
3 Alarm relay activated
4 Alarm relay deactivated

Release A Page 33 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

9 Fault relay position

The relay position refers to one of the 12 module’s socket positions on the DSP500 main board.
Refer to installation section for socket drawing on the DSP500 board.

The fault relay is activated as soon as a measurement error occurs on any of the channel and
stays activated as long as an error is still pending. The errors are automatically clear on the next
measuring cycle.

Note: this button exists only if a relay has been installed (option).

10 ON-OFF test button

This button shows the current position of the optional alarm relay. It can be used to activate or
deactivate the concerned relay for test purpose only. The relay recovers its expected state after
5 seconds or when the alarm screen is left.

Note: this button exists only if a relay has been installed (option).

Release A Page 34 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

3.6 Timing screen

This screen allows selecting the proper measuring and cleaning mode and then to set or
change all the timing values, including for the multiplexing function if used.

6 5 14 15 16 17 10

1
11
2
12
3
13
7

18
9

19
4

16 20

17 21

23
22

24 25 26 27 28 29 23 24

Release A Page 35 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Stopped mode

In this mode, all the automatic measurements or automatic cleaning cycles are stopped.
This mode can be use during maintenance operations or for doing manual measurements only.

2 Continuous measuring mode

In this mode, the measurements are continuously updated at the highest possible rate. The
display and the 4-20 mA output (if any) are updated every second.

The measurements are stored in the internal memory as an average during the period defined
in the “record period” field.

If some of the measuring channels are not compatible with the continuous mode (as NH4 or
PO4 for example) the continuous mode will not be available for selection or will be automatically
updated in periodic mode.

The measurement can be held at anytime if a high level voltage has been applied on the inhibit
input of the LOGIC500 module (if any).

3 Periodic measuring mode

In this mode, the measurements are done at a specific period of time define in the “period” field.

The display and the 4-20 mA output (if any) are updated at the end of the measurement cycle.
The measurements are stored in the internal memory at each cycle.

If the measuring cycle time is higher than the defined period, a new measurement will start
immediately after the previous one.

The measurement can be held at anytime if an high level voltage has been applied on the inhibit
input of the LOGIC500 module (if any).

4 External measuring mode

In this mode, the measurements are started or by a pulse (>0.3 sec) send to the start input of
the LOGIC500 module, or by sending a value of 1 in the start measurement address by a
MODBUS communication.

Release A Page 36 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5 Sampling time for continuous mode

In continuous mode only, the sampling pump is running every 15 seconds during a time defined
in this field. To preserve the tubing life time, put a value as low as possible like 2 or 3 seconds
to just renew the sample.

6 Record period

In continuous mode only, the recorded value is the average of the measurements during the
period defined in this filed.

7 Sampling time for periodic mode

In periodic mode only, the sampling pump is running before every measuring cycle during a time
defined in this field.

8 Measuring period

In periodic mode only, the measuring cycle occurs with a period of time defined in this filed.

9 Settling down time

In periodic mode only, it’s possible to add a settling down time defined in this filed after the
sampling and before the measurement to allow suspended solid to go down.

This mode concerns only a few specific applications, in all other cases, let the default value of 0.

10 External sampling synchronisation

In periodic mode only, it’s possible to synchronize a second external sampling pump through a
relay if this function is activated.

The sampling chronogram is shown below:

Release A Page 37 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Off time

In periodic mode only and if the external sampling function is activated, this field set the off time
for the external pump starting at the beginning of internal sampling.

12 On time

In periodic mode only and if the external sampling function is activated, this field set the on time
for the external pump starting at the end of the off time.

13 Rest time

In periodic mode only and if the external sampling function is activated, this field set the rest
time for the external pump starting at the end of the on time.

The rest time allows suspended solids in the sample to settling down before the internal
sampling.

Release A Page 38 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

14 Acid cleaning function

If activated, the acid cleaning will start automatically according to the defined period.
Acid cleaning is mandatory for NH4 and H2S measurements regarding the risk of deposit inside
the outlet tubing.

15 Auto zero

If acid cleaning is available, an auto-zero can be performed automatically on the acid cleaning
solution if selected.

If the auto-zero is selected, the cleaning solution must be prepared with pure water
and analysis grade acid to get a correct zeroing.

16 Cleaning period for acid cleaning

This field contains the period of time between two cleaning cycles.
The recommended period is 24 hours.

17 Cleaning time for acid cleaning

This field contains the pumping time of the cleaning solution.


The default value is 60 seconds. It is recommended to keep this default value unless authorized
by the manufacturer.

A too short cleaning time may cause a bad zeroing with the auto-zeroing function.
Keep the default value of 60 seconds for a good zeroing.

18 Waiting time after acid cleaning

This field contains the waiting time between the end of the cleaning solution pumping and the
zeroing to enable any bubbles produced by the cleaning pump to go up.
The default value is 5 seconds. It is recommended to keep this default value unless authorized
by the manufacturer.

Release A Page 39 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

19 Recovery time after acid cleaning

This field contains the recovery time before starting again the measurements on the sample
after a cleaning operation. The default value is 30 seconds. It is recommended to keep this
default value unless authorized by the manufacturer.

A too short recovery time may cause erratic measurements during the few seconds
that follow a cleaning cycle.
Keep the default value of 30 seconds for a good sample recovery.

20 Ultrasonic cleaning module

This button shows the ultrasonic module position. It can be set or changed only by the
manufacturer.

Note: this button remains empty if no ultrasonic module is provided (option).

21 Cleaning period for ultrasonic cleaning

This field contains the period of time between two ultrasonic cleaning cycles.
The recommended period is 2 hours. It is recommended to keep this default value unless
authorized by the manufacturer.

22 Cleaning time for ultrasonic cleaning

This field contains the ultrasonic cleaning time.


The default value is 30 seconds. It is recommended to keep this default value unless authorized
by the manufacturer.

23 Waste collect relay module

This button shows the relay module position that drives an electric-valve to collect the sample
after analysis when reagents are use (example PO4 measurement). It can be set or changed
only by the manufacturer.

Note: this button remains empty if no module is provided (option).

Release A Page 40 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

24 ON-OFF test button

This button shows the current position of the optional waste collect relay. It can be used to
activate or deactivate this relay for test purpose only. The relay recovers its expected state after
5 seconds or when the timing screen is left.

Note: this button exists only if a relay has been installed (option).

25 Multiplexing relay modules

Theses buttons show the relay module positions that drives external electric-valve (not
provided) to select a specific sample stream over several streams. They can be set or changed
only by the manufacturer.

Note: theses buttons remain empty if no module are provided (option).

26 ON-OFF test buttons

These buttons show the current position of the multiplexing relays. They can be used to activate
or deactivate theses relays for test purpose only. Each relay recovers its expected state after 5
seconds or when the timing screen is left.

Note: this button exists only if a relay has been installed (option).

27 Sampling times for multiplexing

These fields contains the sampling time of each stream for multiplexing purpose.
The default value is 15 seconds. It must be adjusted depending on the flow of each stream to
get a good renew of the sample.

A too short sampling time may cause erratic measurements as the measured stream
may contain a part of the previous stream.

28 Multiplexing inhibition module

Release A Page 41 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

This button shows the logical input module position that enable to inhibit a specific stream to be
measured (for example if no sample is available). It can be set or changed only by the
manufacturer.

Note: this button remains empty if no module is provided (option).

29 Inhibition test buttons

These buttons show the current states of the inhibition inputs of the logical input modules for
testing purpose.

Note: this button exists only if an inhibition module (LOGIC500) has been installed (option).

Release A Page 42 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

3.6 Communication screen

This screen allows setting or changing the communication settings for the two internal serial
ports of the microcontroller, port A and port B. By default, no communication is activated.

Port A is dedicated to the RS232 port only.


Port B may be affected to the RS485 port or the Wi-Fi module plugged on the DSP500 board
(option) or the Ethernet module plugged on the DSP500 board (option).

25 3 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

13

14
20
15

16 17 18 19 22 23 24 25 21

Release A Page 43 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Remote mode

When selected, the remote communication mode allows driving the analyser at a distance by a
PC laptop. A special software Netscan500 must be installed before on the PC.

The connection thought the RS232 allows a communication at a short distance only (<10
meters) for demonstration purpose with a beamer for example.
For longer distance, a phone modem or GSM modem must be connected on the RS232 port.

2 MODBUS mode

When selected, the MODBUS communication mode allows reading the last measurements or
the error codes as well as starting a new measuring or cleaning cycle. The MODBUS protocol is
a standard and simple protocol implemented on most of the SCADA systems. If necessary, the
full protocol can be downloaded at www.modbus.org .

Basic frames using the function no 3 as shown below allows to read the measurements:

Request from the master unit:

Slave
number
3 Address of first byte NB of bytes CRC16

Answer from the analyser:

Slave ……
3 NB of read bytes 1st byte 2nd byte CRC16
number

A CRC16 is used to check the integrity of the frame.


The frames must be in binary mode (also named RTU mode), not in ASCII mode.

Addresses of the last measurements:

Decimal address Hexadecimal address Value for


16 10H
Channel 1
17 11H
18 12H
Channel 2
19 13H
20 14H
Channel 3
21 15H
………… ………… …………
46 2EH
Channel 16
47 2FH

Release A Page 44 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Addresses of the error code:

Decimal address Hexadecimal address Value for Length (byte)


48 30H Channel 1 4
49 31H Channel 2 4
50 32H Channel 3 4
………… ………… ………… …….
63 3FH Channel 16 4

The measurement values follows the floating point standard IEEE754, format single 32 bit (4
bytes), higher first, lower last. Invalid codes are 1 byte long.

Address for starting of a measurement cycle:

Decimal address Hexadecimal address Value to write Length (byte)


64 40H 1 1

A reading at address 30H returns 0 only when the measurement is finished.

Address for starting of a cleaning cycle:

Decimal address Hexadecimal address Value to write Length (byte)


65 41H 1 1

A reading at address 31H returns 0 only when the measurement is finished.

3 MODBUS slave number

Each device on a MODBUS network has a specific number. This number can be entered in this
field. The default value is 1.

Release A Page 45 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4 Direct RS232 or RS232 modem mode

Select the modem mode if and only if a phone or GSM modem is connected on the RS232 port.

5 Port A Baud rate

The baud rate must be fixed strictly in accordance with the system connected on the RS232 port
and generally at the higher speed compatible with the media capacity.

6 Modem initialisation sequences

Up to 3 Hayes initialization sequences can be entered in these fields. Theses sequences are
send to the modem each time that the analyser is power on.
After entering theses sequence, put off and on again the analyser to send them to the modem.

7 Received characters window

The 10 last received characters are displayed in this window for test purpose only. Non ASCII
characters are represented by a filled black square.

8 Transmitted characters window

The 10 last transmitted characters are displayed in this window for test purpose only. Non ASCII
characters are represented by a filled black square.

9 Transmit test

Pressing on this key transmit “ABC” characters on the port for test purpose only.

Release A Page 46 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 MODBUS test

Pressing on this key displays the MODBUS test screen as below if MODBUS mode is enable.
It displays the diagnostic MODBUS counters updated continuously at each received frame as
well as the time and date of the last received frame.

Counter 1 displays the total number of valid frames received, whatever they are intended or not
for the analyser.

Counter 2 displays the number of frames received with a CRC error, whatever they are
intended or not for the analyser.

Counter 3 displays the number exception answers preceded. Exception answer is produced in
case of unrecognized command or wrong parameter on a received frame.

Counter 4 displays the number of valid frames received specifically intended for the analyser.

Counter 5 displays the number of valid broadcast frames received. Broadcast frame are not
usual.

Counter 6 is not in use (for compatibility only).

Release A Page 47 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Counter 8 displays the number of characters received with a format error, whatever they are
intended or not for the analyser.

Counter 9 displays the number of frames proceeds for which an answer has been sent to the
host.

The Modbus addresses of the channels and other functions can be visualized by pressing on
the “addresses” key as shown below:

11 Remote mode

When selected, the remote communication mode allows driving the analyser at a distance by a
PC laptop. A special software Netscan500 must be installed before on the PC.

The maximal cable length on the RS485 port is 1200 m (4000 ft).

12 MODBUS mode

Refer to the screen number 2 for the MODBUS protocol details and addresses.

Release A Page 48 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

13 MODBUS slave number

Each device on a MODBUS network has a specific number. This number can be entered in this
field. The default value is 1.

14 RS485 interface selection

The port B can be use through an RS485 interface located on the DSP500 board. Refer to the
installation section for wiring.

If the RS485 interface is selected, Wi-Fi interface or Ethernet interface are desactivated, even if
the optional module(s) has been installed on the DSP500 board.

15 Wi-Fi interface selection

The port B can be use through an optional Wi-Fi interface module located on the DSP500
board. The module output is connected to an external antenna on the side of the analyser.

If the Wi-Fi interface is selected, RS485 interface or Ethernet interface are deactivated, even if
the optional module has been installed on the DSP500 board.

16 Ethernet interface selection

The port B can be use through an optional Ethernet interface module located on the DSP500
board.
If the Ethernet interface is selected, RS485 interface or Wi-Fi interface are deactivated, even if
the optional module has been installed on the DSP500 board.

17 Baud rate for RS485

The baud rate must be fixed strictly in accordance with the system connected on the RS485 port
and generally at the higher speed compatible with the media capacity. This baud rate does not
apply for the Wi-Fi or for the Ethernet interface.

Release A Page 49 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

18 Wi-Fi SSID

The Wi-Fi network name (SSID) must be entered in this field before using the Wi-Fi
communication. All devices linked by the same Wi-Fi network must have the same SSID.

19 Wi-Fi WEP key

The Wi-Fi networks are generally encrypted using a WEP key to protect data privacy. The WEP
key of the network must be entered in this field before using the Wi-Fi communication.

Both 64 bits keys (10 characters) and 128 bits keys (26 characters) are accepted.
If no WEP key are used (unsecured network), leave this field blank.

The Wi-Fi module is reinitialised each time new parameters are entered, so the new parameters
are taken in account within a few seconds.

20 Ethernet IP address

Use this series of fields to enter the Ethernet IP address in accordance with the network
parameters. The Ethernet module is reinitialised each time new parameters are entered, so the
new parameters are taken in account within a few seconds.

21 Ethernet IP mask

Use this series of fields to enter the address mask in accordance with the network parameters.
The Ethernet module is reinitialised each time new parameters are entered, so the new
parameters are taken in account within a few seconds.

22 Received characters window

The 10 last received characters are displayed in this window for test purpose only. Non ASCII
characters are represented by a filled black square.

Release A Page 50 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

23 Transmitted characters window

The 10 last transmitted characters are displayed in this window for test purpose only. Non ASCII
characters are represented by a filled black square.

24 Transmit test button

Pressing on this key transmit “ABC” characters on the port for test purpose only.

25 MODBUS test

Pressing on this key displays the MODBUS test screen. Refer to the arrow number 10 above.

Release A Page 51 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

3.7 Regional setting screen

This screen allows setting or changing the regional settings like the language, date, decimal
separator, date format as well as miscellaneous parameters as screen saver and display
appearance.

1 2 3

4 6 7 5

Release A Page 52 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Language selection

Choose the appropriate language using this series of button. The change is immediate.

2 Clock update

Update the date and time using theses series of fields. The change is immediate and all
engaged measuring cycle or cleaning cycle will be aborted and automatically rescheduled
according to the new date and time.

3 Screen saver

These series of button configures the screen saver mode:

- No: there no screen saver. The screen stay back lighted all the time.

- 15 min: the screen back light turns off after 15 minutes of touch screen inactivity. All the
functions like measurements, cleaning, and communication remain active. Press anywhere in
the screen to reactivate the screen back light.

- Night: the screen back light turns off after 7 pm until 7 am. All the functions like
measurements, cleaning, and communication remain active. Press anywhere in the screen to
reactivate the screen back light.

4 User password

This field allows changing the user level password. The default password is 123.
The user level allows the access only to measurements display and basic parameters as alarm
levels.

5 Administrator password

This field allows changing the administrator level password. The default password is 456.
The administrator level allows the access to all the parameters.

Release A Page 53 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Decimal separator

This button allows choosing a point or a comma as decimal separator for the recorded
measurement field.

7 Date format

This button allows choosing between the usual date format (day/month/year) or the American
date format (month/day/year).

Release A Page 54 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

3.8 Factory screen

It allows backup or restoring the complete analyser configuration internally in a flash memory or
externally on a USB key, to set or delete measuring channels, to change the thermal control
parameters, to test the 24V DC output and other hardware.

2 3 4 5 6 7 12 13

9
8

10 11

14
15

16
19
17

18

20 21

Release A Page 55 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Delete all

This button reset completely the analyser configuration, including channels, calibration, alarms,
communications, timings and regional settings.

This function is reserved to the manufacturer and protected by a code.

2 Backup on EEPROM

This button allows backup the complete analyser configuration, including channels, calibration,
alarms, communications, timings and regional settings on the internal flash memory (EEPROM).

3 Backup on USB key

This button allows backup the complete analyser configuration, including channels, calibration,
alarms, communications, timings and regional settings on a USB key.

After pressing this button, the analyser waits for the connection of a USB key. Press on any key
to cancel this function.

4 Restore from EEPROM

This button allows backup the complete analyser configuration, including channels, calibration,
alarms, communications, timings and regional settings from the internal flash memory
(EEPROM).

5 Restore from USB key

This button allows restoring the complete analyser configuration, including channels, calibration,
alarms, communications, timings and regional settings from a USB key.

After pressing this button, the analyser waits for the connection of a USB key. Press on any key
to cancel this function.

Release A Page 56 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Stored measurements deleting

This button clears all the stored measurements inside the internal memory.

7 Software version and board number

This area displays the software version and the DSP500 board number.

8 Channels list and deleting button

Theses buttons display the list of the measuring channels.


Pressing on one of theses buttons allows deleting the corresponding measuring channel.

This button is reserved to the manufacturer and protected by a code.

9 Channels method

Theses buttons display the method used for the measuring channels in case of different method
available, for example “SPECTRO” for spectrograph, “LED” for LED source.

10 Channel adding

Theses buttons allows adding a measuring channel if the corresponding hardware has been
installed before.

This button is reserved to the manufacturer and protected by a code.

Release A Page 57 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Module function

Theses buttons display the function and the position allocated by the manufacturer to each of
the 12 modules that can be plugged on the DSP500 board. For the 4-20 mA outputs, the
corresponding channel is display on the second line.

These buttons are reserved to the manufacturer and protected by a code.

12 Photodiode connector position

Theses buttons display the position allocated by the manufacturer to the photodiodes
connectors for each channel using a photodiode.
Theses buttons stay blank if no photodiodes are used.

These buttons are reserved to the manufacturer and protected by a code.

13 LED or PM position

Theses buttons display the position allocated by the manufacturer to each channel using a
photomultiplier board (PM) or a LED board.
These buttons stay blank if no PM or LED are used.

These buttons are reserved to the manufacturer and protected by a code.

14 Xenon lamp connector position

Theses buttons display the position allocated by the manufacturer for the xenon lamps.

The top position is always allocated to the gas phase measurements (NH4, H2S) while the
second is for absorbance measurements on the water sample (NO3, UV245, Colour, PO4) and
the third one for fluorescence (PAH/Oil, Chlorophyll).

Release A Page 58 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

15 Measured temperature (temperature channels 1,2,3)

This field display the temperature measured on each of the 3 temperature channels.

Note: If no Pt100 probe is connected, a temperature close to -273 °C is displayed.

16 Temperature set point (temperature channels 1,2,3)

This field allows setting or changing the temperature set point for each of the 3 temperature
control loop. They can be used or not depending of the configuration.

These buttons are reserved to the manufacturer and protected by a code.

17 Output power percentage (temperature channels 1,2,3)

This field shows the present power output value in percent for each of the 3 temperature control
loop. 100% means the output is on all the time, 0% means the output is off all the time. For
intermediate values, the output is on during the percent value of a periodic cycle of about 2
seconds.

18 Output ON or OFF for testing (temperature channels 1,2,3)

This button turn on or off the power output for each of the 3 temperature control loop for testing
purpose only.

Note: the output automatically resume to the normal state after 5 seconds.

19 PID parameters (temperature channels 1,2,3)

This button displays the popup below where the PID parameters can be changed for each of the
3 temperature control loop.

These buttons are reserved to the manufacturer and protected by a code.

Release A Page 59 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

20 ON/OFF status and test for 24V outputs

Theses button display the current state of each of the 12 outputs. Theses outputs are driving
internal pumps and valves depending on the configuration as indicated above each button.

Pressing on one of these keys put ON or OFF the corresponding output for testing purpose
only.

Action on the outputs may cause unpredictable results on an engaged measuring


cycle. It’s recommended to stop first any measurement by selecting the stopped
mode on the timing screen.

21 ADC values

This area displays the 16 channels of the internal ADC (Analogue to Digital Converter) of the
DSP. These values are for the manufacturer only.

Release A Page 60 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4 Principle, test and recalibration


The next section describes parameter by parameter the measuring principle and also explains
how to check the measurement and how to recalibrate it if necessary.

4.1 Ammoniac (NH4+)

4.1 .1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the analysis of the UV absorption spectrum of the
ammonia gas (NH3) in equilibrium with the dissolved ammonia gas in the water sample.

A small quantity of sodium hydroxide (NaOH) is added to the sample to increasing the pH above
11 where most of the NH4+ is transformed in NH3 (>99.9%).

The UV light is generated by a pulsed xenon lamp to reach an ultra long life time.
The absorption spectrum is performed by a concave grating coupled to a 2048 pixels CCD
(Charge-Coupled Device).

A Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) is applied on the absorption spectrum to extract the periodic
peaks specific to the ammonia gas.

Automatic temperature compensation is done using a Pt100 temperature probe on the sample.

1 Sample with NaOH 4 Air pump


2 Temperature probe 5 Xenon lamp
3 Gas flow cell 6 Spectrograph with grating and CCD

Release A Page 61 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.1 .2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. It corresponds to the last measurement done
(automatic or manual) concerning the concentration or error code, sample temperature, lamp
spectrum, absorbance spectrum and FFT spectrum.

7 1 6 8 9 10 11

4 33

3
34

21
12
32
22
13 23
24
14 25
26

15 27
28

16 29

17 20 19 18 31 30

Release A Page 62 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit, as well as the sample temperature read
during the measurement.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or the cleaning pump or the ultrasonic cleaning (if any).

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 63 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 NaOH pump button

Pressing on this button starts the NaOH pump for testing purpose or to fill the tubing after
installation. The pump will stop automatically after 10 seconds.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Measuring cycle steps display

During a measuring cycle, this area displays the different steps of the cycle with an associated
countdown timer or counter.
During the ammonia measurements, the steps are:

1) Purging: the gas flow cell is purged by external ambient air

2) Zeroing: the reference spectrum on air is acquired

3) Sampling: the sample is renewed inside in the stripping pot

4) Reagent: the NaOH is added to the sample inside the stripping pot

5) Stripping: the gas flow cell is placed in a close loop with the stripping pot

6) Measuring: the spectrum is acquired on the gas coming through the sample, and then the
concentration is computed and displayed

7) Purging: the gas flow cell is purged again by external ambient air to remove humidity

8 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “calibration” section.

Release A Page 64 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

9 Signal graph

This graph displays the lamp spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is updated during
the measuring cycle when the lamp is flashing.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

The signal is normally saturated for wavelength above 215 nm as ammonia measurement is
performed at lower wavelength.

It’s recommended to have a signal at 210 nm above 1000 to get a good repeatability, but
measurement can still be done for signal as low as 100 if the repeatability is not critical as on
waste water for values above 1 mg/l.

If the light signal is too high, an alarm message is displayed on the top left corner.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

Release A Page 65 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Absorbance spectrum

This graph displays the absorbance spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is displayed
in light grey during a measuring cycle until updated.

For more details or to investigate about the absorbance spectrum, press anywhere on the graph
to zoom it as below:

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows located above the Y axis.

Release A Page 66 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 FFT spectrum

This graph displays the FFT spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is displayed in light
grey during a measuring cycle until updated.

For more details or to investigate about the FFT spectrum, press anywhere on the graph to
zoom it as below:

The peak value is the average FFT value inside the NH3 band (red dot lines).
The ref value is the average FFT value outside the NH3 band.
They are represented by the green lines.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows located above the Y axis.

Release A Page 67 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

12 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The unit size is
limited to 6 characters.

14 Display mode

This button allows selecting the concentration display mode as NH4 (default mode) or as N of
NH4.
If N-NH4 is selected, the NH4 concentrations are multiplied by 14/18=0.7777 before displaying
and the label is automatically updated to “N-NH4”.
The measurements previously stored in the internal memory will keep their values in NH4.

15 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

16 Number of decimal

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

Release A Page 68 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

17 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

18 Temperature adjustment

The temperature of the sample given by the internal temperature probe can be adjusted by this
field. This adjustment is not important as any difference of temperature is taken in account
during the calibration. But if this value is changed, a new calibration must be done.

19 Temperature coefficient

The sample temperature affects directly the NH3 liquid/gas ratio. This coefficient is used for the
temperature compensation. It can be change only by the manufacturer.

20 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 69 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

21 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

Release A Page 70 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

22 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

23 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

24 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

25 Reaction time

This field allows changing the stripping time before measuring.

Precautions must be taken before changing this value.


It can be use very exceptionally in case of change of pump or for special experimentation.

26 Reagent time

This field allows changing the reagent pumping.

Precautions must be taken before changing this value.


It can be use exceptionally in case of special sample with high salinity.

Release A Page 71 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

27 Wavelength mini

This field allows changing the minimal wavelength taken in account for the measurement.

Precautions must be taken before changing this value.


It can be use very exceptionally to avoid a known interference on the absorbance spectrum.

28 Wavelength max

This field allows changing the maximal wavelength taken in account for the measurement.

Precautions must be taken before changing this value.


It can be use very exceptionally to avoid known interference on the absorbance spectrum.

29 FFT min frequency

This field allows changing the minimal frequency off the FFT taken in account for the
measurement.

Precautions must be taken before changing this value.


It can be use very exceptionally to fit the NH3 FFT peak inside the active frequency band.

30 FFT max frequency

This field allows changing the maximal frequency off the FFT taken in account for the
measurement.

Precautions must be taken before changing this value.


It can be use very exceptionally to fit the NH3 FFT peak inside the active frequency band.

31 Background factor

This field allows changing the multiplying background factor of the FFT off-band signal.

Precautions must be taken before changing this value.


It can be use very exceptionally to centre on zero the measurements on zero water or to
compensate a know interference.

Release A Page 72 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

32 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

33 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0,0
as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these points.

34 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

Release A Page 73 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.1 .3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated. However, periodical checking is recommended and a


recalibration might be necessary after several months depending of the conditions of use.

To recalibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Prepare a 10 mg/l NH4 standard. For this weight 2.944 g of dried ammonium chloride (ClNH4)
and dilute in 1litre of distilled water to obtain a mere solution of 1g/l NH4. Then take 10 ml of this
mere solution and complete to 1 litre of distilled water.

- Do at least 3 manual measurements on this 10 mg/l standard using the check screen. The last
two measurements must be close together with less than 5% of difference.

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen (as describe above) and then enter the
standard value on the keypad.

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 74 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.2 Chlorophyll A

4.2 .1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the red light fluorescence that is a typical characteristic of
the chlorophyll A

The light is generated by a pulsed xenon lamp to reach an ultra long life time.
The excitation filter limits the bandwidth of the excitation light, while the emission filter selects
the specific fluorescent light.

The detection is done by a high sensitivity photomultiplier.

A second detector (optional) is used to compensate the eventual absorbance of the sample due
to turbidity.

1 Xenon UV lamp 4 Emission filter


2 Excitation filter 5 Photomultiplier
3 Flow cell 6 Photo detector

Release A Page 75 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.2 .2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration or error code corresponds to the
last measurement done, while signal values and graph are updated continuously.

1 7 8 9 10 11 12
6

13 21 30

14 22

23
15

16

17

18

19 20 24 25 26 27 28 29

Release A Page 76 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit, as well as the sample temperature and
standard deviation (sigma) obtained on the elemental acquisitions.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 77 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

8 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water inside the flow cell before pressing on this button.

Note: an auto-zero is performed automatically during each acid cleaning if this option is selected
on the timing screen.

Release A Page 78 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

9 PM signal

This window displays the PM signal continuously. This signal corresponds to the fluorescent
light re-emitted by the chlorophyll A.

On pure water, this signal is normally close to zero with fluctuations of a few tens of mV.

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.

It might be caused by an over-range concentration of the sample or by ambient light if the door
of the analyser is opened with a high level of ambient light (sun, daylight).

10 Photo detector signal

This window displays the photo detector signal continuously (optional). This signal corresponds
to the excitation light of the sample. It is use to compensate an eventual absorption of the
excitation blue light by the sample, for example due to turbidity.

On pure water, the signal must normally be in a 200 mV to 2000 mV range.

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.
It might be caused by ambient light if the door of the analyser is opened with a high level of
ambient light (sun, daylight).

Release A Page 79 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 PM Signal graph

This graph displays the PM signal continuously updated. This signal corresponds to the
fluorescent light re-emitted by the chlorophyll A.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

The average signal value in mV and its standard deviation (sigma) on the last 500 acquisitions
are displayed on the bottom right of the screen.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows. After reading, restart the
acquisitions by pressing on the “play” button if necessary.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 80 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

12 Photo detector signal graph

This graph displays the photo detector signal continuously updated. This signal corresponds to
the excitation light of the sample.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it.
Refer to PM signal graph for the zoom display.

13 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

14 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

15 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

16 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

Release A Page 81 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

17 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

18 Temperature adjustment

The temperature of the sample given by the internal temperature probe can be adjusted by this
field. This adjustment is not important as any difference of temperature is taken in account
during the calibration. But if this value is changed, a new calibration must be done.

19 Temperature coefficient

The fluorescence is affected by the temperature. This coefficient is used for the temperature
compensation.

20 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 82 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

Release A Page 83 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

21 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

22 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

23 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

24 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

25 Turbidity factor

This field enable a compensation of the excitation light loses due to turbidity.
A value of 1.0 corresponds to a basic compensation.

Release A Page 84 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

26 Offset

This field show the internal offset applied on the signal for the zeroing.
It is updated at each zeroing and has not to be changed.
It can be used for troubleshooting by the manufacturer.

27 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

28 Last zeros window

This window displays the 10 last zeros done with the date, time and zero value adjustment,
whatever manually or by an automatic cleaning cycle.

Note: a strong zero adjustment value might reveal an abnormal zeroing operation.

29 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

30 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

Release A Page 85 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.2 .3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated. However, periodical checking is recommended and a


recalibration might be necessary after several months depending of the conditions of use.

To recalibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Prepare a 1 mg/l standard of Chlorophyll A (example Sigma Aldrich C5753-1MG, dissolution in


alcohol is recommended)

- Do a manual measurement using the check screen (as described above)

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen and then enter the standard value

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 86 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.3 Colour by LED

4.3 .1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the light absorption on the blue area according to the Beer-
Lambert law:

[C ] = k ⋅ log I 0 
 I1 

With [C ] : Sample concentration


k: Absorption coefficient (molecule specific)
I0: Light intensity before the sample
I1 : Light intensity after of the sample

A second light beam is used to compensate the turbidity of the sample or an eventual deposit
inside the flow cell in the yellow area.
The light is generated alternatively by LEDs.

1 Blue LED (peak) 3 Photo detector


2 Yellow LED (reference) 4 Flow cell

Release A Page 87 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.3 .2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration or error code corresponds to the
last measurement done, while signal values and graph are updated continuously.

1 7 8 9 10 11 12
6

13 19 27

14 20

21
15

16

17

18

22 23 24 25 26

Release A Page 88 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit, as well as the standard deviation (sigma)
obtained on the elemental acquisitions.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 89 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

8 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water inside the flow cell before pressing on this button.

Note: an auto-zero is performed automatically during each acid cleaning if this option is selected
on the timing screen.

Release A Page 90 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

9 LED 1 signal

This window displays the LED1 signal continuously. This signal corresponds to the light that can
be absorbed by the yellow colour of the sample.

On pure water, the signal must normally be in a 1000 to 2000 mV range (value below 500 mV
might deteriorate significantly the repeatability while values above 2500 mV might cause an
error for light saturation).

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.
It might be caused by ambient light if the door of the analyser is opened with a high level of
ambient light (sun, daylight) or by an optical misalignment.

10 LED 2 signal

This window displays the LED2 signal continuously. This signal corresponds to the reference
light that is not absorbed by the colour of the sample.

On pure water or with a sample without turbidity, the signal must normally be in a 1000 to
2000 mV range (value below 500 mV might deteriorate significantly the repeatability while
values above 2500 mV might cause an error for light saturation).

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.
It might be caused by ambient light if the door of the analyser is opened with a high level of
ambient light (sun, daylight) or by an optical misalignment.

Release A Page 91 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 LED1 Signal graph

This graph displays the LED1 signal continuously updated. This signal corresponds to the light
that can be absorbed by the yellow colour of the sample.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

The average signal value in mV and its standard deviation (sigma) on the last 500 acquisitions
are displayed on the bottom right of the screen.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows. After reading, restart the
acquisitions by pressing on the “play” button if necessary.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 92 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

12 LED2 Signal graph

This graph displays the LED2 signal continuously updated. This signal corresponds to the
reference light that is not absorbed by the organic matter.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it.
Refer to LED1 signal graph for the zoom display.

13 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

14 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

15 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

16 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

Release A Page 93 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

17 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

18 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 94 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

19 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

Release A Page 95 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

20 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

21 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

22 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

23 Offset

This field show the internal offset applied on the signal for the zeroing.
It is updated at each zeroing and has not to be changed.
It can be used for troubleshooting by the manufacturer.

24 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

25 Last zeros window

This window displays the 10 last zeros done with the date, time and zero value adjustment,
whatever manually or by an automatic cleaning cycle.

Note: a strong zero adjustment value might reveal an abnormal zeroing operation.

Release A Page 96 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

26 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

27 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

Release A Page 97 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.3 .3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated. However, periodical checking is recommended and a


recalibration might be necessary after several months depending of the conditions of use.

To recalibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Take a Pt-Co standard of 100 Pt-Co units

- Do a manual measurement on this standard using the check screen (as describe above).

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen and then enter the standard value on the
keypad.

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 98 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.4 Colour by spectrograph

4.4.1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the blue light absorption to the Beer-Lambert law:

[C ] = k ⋅ log I 0 
 I1 

With [C ] : Sample concentration


k: Absorption coefficient (molecule specific)
I0: Light intensity before the sample
I1 : Light intensity after of the sample

The light is generated by a pulsed xenon lamp to reach an ultra long life time.
The absorption spectrum is performed by a concave grating coupled to a 2048 pixels CCD
(Charge-Coupled Device).

A double-wavelength algorithm allows compensating the turbidity or a deposit inside the flow
cell.

1 Xenon flash lamp


2 Sample flow cell
3 Spectrograph with concave grating and CCD detector

Release A Page 99 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.4.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration or error code corresponds to the
last measurement done, as well as the signal and absorbance graphs.

7 1 6 8 9 10 11

2
18
12 29
19
13 26
20
14
21

15

16

17 22 23 24 25 27 28

Release A Page 100 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 101 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Measuring cycle steps display

During a measuring cycle or a zeroing cycle, this area displays a counter of the elemental
acquisitions preceded by the message “measuring…” or “zeroing…” respectively.

8 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water inside the flow cell before pressing on this button.

Note: an auto-zero is performed automatically during each acid cleaning if this option is selected
on the timing screen.

9 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

Release A Page 102 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Signal graph

This graph displays the lamp spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is updated during
the measuring cycle when the lamp is flashing.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

To acquire again the lamp signal, press on the “play” button.

With pure water inside the flow cell, the signal must not be saturated (below 2000 mV) on the
two wavelengths bands used for the absorbance calculation defined as “Peak wavelength” and
“Ref wavelength” on the check screen. Otherwise, an error will occur during the measuring
cycle.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 103 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Absorbance spectrum

This graph displays the absorbance spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is displayed
in light grey during a measuring cycle until updated.

For more details or to investigate about the absorbance spectrum, press anywhere on the graph
to zoom it as below:

The average absorbance for the peak wavelength band and for the reference wavelength band
are represented by a green line and displayed above the curve.

The difference is used to calculate the final concentration.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 104 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

12 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

14 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

15 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

16 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

Release A Page 105 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

17 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 106 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

18 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

19 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

20 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

Release A Page 107 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

21 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

22 Peak wavelength

This field allows changing the peak wavelength taken in account for the measurement. It
corresponds to a wavelength absorbed by yellow colour of the sample.

The default value is 350 nm. It can be changed exceptionally to avoid a known interference.

23 Peak width

This field allows changing the width band of the peak wavelength taken in account for the
measurement.

It may be exceptionally enlarged or reduced to avoid a known.

24 Reference wavelength

This field allows changing the reference wavelength taken in account for the measurement.
It corresponds normally to a wavelength where the colour sample doesn’t absorb.

The default value is 590 nm. It can be changed exceptionally to avoid a known interference.

25 Reference width

This field allows changing the width band of the reference wavelength taken in account for the
measurement.

It may be exceptionally enlarged or reduced to avoid a known interference.

Release A Page 108 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

26 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

27 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

28 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

28 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

Release A Page 109 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.4.3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated. However, periodical checking is recommended and a


recalibration might be necessary after several months depending of the conditions of use.

To recalibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Take a Pt-Co standard of 100 Pt-Co units

- Do a manual measurement on this standard using the check screen (as describe above).

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen and then enter the standard value on the
keypad.

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 110 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.5 Conductivity

4.5.1 Principle

The conductivity is the reciprocal of resistance and is determined by the ratio current/voltage
according to Ohm’s law.

1 l amps
C= =
R l volt

The conductivity is measured in Siemens by two immersed electrodes of an area A separated


by a distance d.

Since the measured conductivity depends on the electrode geometry, the measured
conductivity must be multiplied by the cell constant to obtain the specific conductivity expressed
in Siemens per centimeter (S/cm).

d
The cell constant is defined by: k=
A

The conductivity of a solution is proportional to its ion concentration, as long as there is no ionic
interaction.

Typical specific conductivity and cell constant:

Solution Specific conductivity (µS/cm)


Absolute pure water 0.055
Boiler water 1
Tap water 50
Ocean water 50,000

Application Typical range (µS/cm) Recommended Cell constant K


Ultra-pure water 0 to 2 0.01
Pure water, boiler 1 to 200 0.1
River, tap water 10 to 2,000 1
Sea water, effluents 1,000 to 200,000 10

As conductivity depends of the temperature, a temperature sensor is generally include in the


electrode (100 Ohm Platinum resistor) and must be connected to the instrument for automatic
temperature compensation (ATC).

The default coefficient is 2% per ºC but may be modified according to the solution typical
coefficient obtain experimentally.

Release A Page 111 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.5.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The conductivity (or error code), signals and history
graph are continuously updated.

1 6 7 8 9 10

2
19
11 26
20
12 23
21
13
22
14

15

16

17 24 25
18

Release A Page 112 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit.

During an automatic measuring cycle, the measured value is display in light green until
replaced by the new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

This button is not used for this parameter.

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stops the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Release A Page 113 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

7 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water on the electrode.


Alternatively, disconnect the electrode.

8 Scale button

This button is used for calibrating the electrode on a high value.

Wait that the electrode stabilizes on the standard solution before calibrating. It may
take several minutes, especially if the electrode was dry before using.

To avoid a wrong calibration, calibrate first the electrode on the zero point (as
described above).

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

9 Signal value

This area displays the conductivity in mV read on the channel of the conductivity module.

Release A Page 114 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Conductivity history graph

This area displays the conductivity value over the last 500 acquisitions, starting when the check
screen appears.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 115 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

12 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

14 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

15 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

Release A Page 116 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

16 Temperature adjustment

The temperature of the sample given by the internal temperature probe can be adjusted by this
field. This adjustment is not important as any difference of temperature is taken in account
during the calibration. But if this value is changed significantly, a new calibration must be done.

17 Temperature coefficient

The conductivity is affected by the temperature. This coefficient is used for the temperature
compensation. The default value is 2%. It may be adjusted depending of the solution.

18 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 117 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

19 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

20 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.

Release A Page 118 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

21 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

22 Offset

This field show the internal offset applied on the signal for the zeroing.
It is updated at each zeroing and has not to be changed.
It can be used for troubleshooting by the manufacturer.

23 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

24 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

25 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

26 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

Release A Page 119 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.5.3 Recalibration

The conductivity electrode must be checked on a regular base depending on the condition of
use, and recalibrated if necessary.

To recalibrate the electrode, proceed as follow:

- Put the electrode in pure water (or alternatively disconnect the electrode)

- Do manual measurement using the check screen (as describe above), wait for the stabilisation
of the conductivity value, then press on the ZERO key.

- Put the electrode in a standard solution for conductivity

- Do manual measurement on this buffer using the check screen, wait for the stabilisation of the
conductivity, then press on the SCALE key and enter the standard value on the keypad.

The calibration is finished. New offset and calibration factors has been calculated and has been
recorded inside the zero and calibration history displayed on the check screen.

These new calibration factors will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 120 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.6 Dissolved oxygen

4.6.1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the fluorescence quenching by oxygen of a special


polymer membrane in contact with the sample. The light is emitted by a LED while two detectors
with red and blue filters are measuring the fluorescent light (red) and the reference light (blue).

In presence of oxygen, the fluorescence decreases that decreases the signal on the red
detector.

The dissolved oxygen probe delivers a 4-20 mA signal that is connected to a 4-20 mA input
module. This module also delivers the 12V DC voltage to supply the probe.

1 LED light source 5 Red filter


2 Fluorescence photo detector 6 Luminophore
3 Reference photo detector 7 Insulation membrane
4 Blue filter

Release A Page 121 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.6.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.
If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The dissolved oxygen value, signals and history graph
are continuously updated.

1 6 7 8 9 10

2
17
11 24
18
12 21
19
13
20
14

15

16 22 23

Release A Page 122 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit.

During an automatic measuring cycle, the measured value is display in light green until replaced
by the new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

This button is not used for this parameter.

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stops the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Release A Page 123 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

7 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first the DO electrode in a sample without oxygen.

8 Scale button

This button is used for calibrating the DO electrode on a high value (air for example).

To avoid a wrong calibration, calibrate first the connected device on the zero point
(as described above).

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

9 Signal value

This area displays the signal in mV read on the input channel of the 4-20 mA input module.

Release A Page 124 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Input history graph

This area displays the dissolved oxygen values over the last 500 acquisitions, starting when the
check screen appears.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 125 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

12 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

14 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

15 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

Release A Page 126 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

16 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

Release A Page 127 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

17 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

18 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

19 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

20 Offset

This field show the internal offset applied on the signal for the zeroing.
It is updated at each zeroing and has not to be changed.
It can be used for troubleshooting by the manufacturer.

21 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

Release A Page 128 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

22 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

23 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

Normally, no linearization is necessary with the DO probe.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

24 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

Release A Page 129 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.6.3 Recalibration

The DO probe must be checked on a regular base depending of the application, and
recalibrated if necessary.

To recalibrate the probe, proceed as follow:

- Put the probe on zero-oxygen solution. A zero solution can be prepared by dissolving 10 g of
sodium sulfite into 300 ml of pure water and adding "a shake" of cobalt chloride, which acts as
a catalyst.

- Do a manual measurement using the check screen (as describe above), wait that the value
stabilizes (it may takes a few minutes) then press on the ZERO key.

- Put the probe on air, the membrane must be dry.

- Do a manual measurement using the check screen, wait that the value stabilizes then press
on the SCALE key and enter the value as explained below on the keypad.

If the unit is in mg/l, refer to the table below to enter the appropriate value depending of
the probe temperature:

Temperature(°C) Solubility of oxygen (mg/l)


0 14.6
5 12.7
10 11.3
15 10.1
20 9.1
25 8.2
30 7.5
35 6.9
40 6.4

If the unit is in %, the value must be 100%

The calibration is finished. New offset and calibration factors has been calculated and has been
recorded inside the zero and calibration history displayed on the check screen.

These new calibration factors will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 130 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.7 Hydrocarbons

4.7 .1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the UV light fluorescence that is a typical characteristic of
the mono or poly aromatics hydrocarbons (PAH)

The UV light is generated by a pulsed xenon lamp to reach an ultra long life time.
The excitation filter limits the bandwidth of the excitation light, while the emission filter selects
the specific fluorescent light.

The detection is done by a high sensitivity photomultiplier.

A second detector (optional) is used to compensate the eventual absorbance of the sample due
for example to organic matter.

1 Xenon UV lamp 4 Emission filter


2 Excitation filter 5 Photomultiplier
3 Flow cell 6 Photo detector

Release A Page 131 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.7 .2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration or error code corresponds to the
last measurement done, while signal values and graph are updated continuously.

1 7 8 9 10 11 12
6

13 22 31

14 23

24
15

16

17

18

19 21 20 25 26 27 28 29 30

Release A Page 132 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit, as well as the sample temperature and
standard deviation (sigma) obtained on the elemental acquisitions.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 133 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

8 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water inside the flow cell before pressing on this button.

Note: an auto-zero is performed automatically during each acid cleaning if this option is selected
on the timing screen.

Release A Page 134 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

9 PM signal

This window displays the PM signal continuously. This signal corresponds to the fluorescent
light re-emitted by the aromatics hydrocarbons contained in the sample.

On pure water, this signal is normally close to zero with fluctuations of a few tens of mV.

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.

It might be caused by an over-range concentration of the sample.

10 Photo detector signal

This window displays the photo detector signal continuously (optional). This signal corresponds
to the excitation light of the sample. It is use to compensate an eventual absorption of the
excitation light at 254 nm by the sample, for example organic matter.

On pure water, the signal must normally be in a 200 mV to 2000 mV range.

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.
It might be caused by ambient light if the door of the analyser is opened with a high level of
ambient light (sun, daylight).

Release A Page 135 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 PM Signal graph

This graph displays the PM signal continuously updated. This signal corresponds to the
fluorescent light re-emitted by the aromatics hydrocarbons contained in the sample.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

The average signal value in mV and its standard deviation (sigma) on the last 500 acquisitions
are displayed on the bottom right of the screen.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows. After reading, restart the
acquisitions by pressing on the “play” button if necessary.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 136 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

12 Photo detector signal graph

This graph displays the photo detector signal continuously updated. This signal corresponds to
the excitation light of the sample.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it.
Refer to PM signal graph for the zoom display.

13 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

14 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

15 Display mode

This button allows selecting the concentration display mode as PAH or as OIL (default mode).

If OIL is selected, the calibration factor is preset to a value of 10 to take in account a


predetermined ratio of 10% of aromatic hydrocarbons in the sample.

The measurements previously stored in the internal memory keep their original values.

16 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

Release A Page 137 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

17 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

18 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

19 Temperature adjustment

The temperature of the sample given by the internal temperature probe can be adjusted by this
field. This adjustment is not important as any difference of temperature is taken in account
during the calibration. But if this value is changed, a new calibration must be done.

20 Temperature coefficient

The fluorescence is affected by the temperature. This coefficient is used for the temperature
compensation.

21 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 138 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

Release A Page 139 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

22 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

23 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

24 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

25 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

26 Turbidity factor

This field enable a compensation of the excitation light loses due to turbidity, organic matter.
A value of 1.0 corresponds to a basic compensation.

Release A Page 140 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

27 Offset

This field show the internal offset applied on the signal for the zeroing.
It is updated at each zeroing and has not to be changed.
It can be used for troubleshooting by the manufacturer.

28 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

29 Last zeros window

This window displays the 10 last zeros done with the date, time and zero value adjustment,
whatever manually or by an automatic cleaning cycle.

Note: a strong zero adjustment value might reveal an abnormal zeroing operation.

30 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

31 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

Release A Page 141 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.7 .3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated on phenol. Depending on the aromatic ratio of the sample a
recalibration based on a laboratory measurement is generally recommended.

To recalibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Collect about two litres of a significant sample in two different bottles

- Do a laboratory analysis on one of the two bottles.

- When the result is obtained, do a manual measurement on the remaining sample using the
check screen describe above.

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen and then enter the sample value determined
by the laboratory on the keypad.

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 142 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.8 Hydrogen sulphide (H2S)

4.8 .1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the analysis of the UV absorption spectrum of the
hydrogen sulphide gas (H2S) in equilibrium with the dissolved hydrogen sulphide gas in the
water sample.

A small quantity of hydrochloric acid (HCl) is added to the sample to decreasing the pH below 1
where most of the S2- is transformed in H2S (>99.9%).

The UV light is generated by a pulsed xenon lamp to reach an ultra long life time.
The absorption spectrum is performed by a concave grating coupled to a 2048 pixels CCD
(Charge-Coupled Device).

A two-wavelength method is applied to measure the H2S concentration.

Automatic temperature compensation is done using a Pt100 temperature probe on the sample.

1 Sample with HCl 4 Air pump


2 Temperature probe 5 Xenon lamp
3 Gas flow cell 6 Spectrograph with grating and CCD

Release A Page 143 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.8 .2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. It corresponds to the last measurement done
(automatic or manual) concerning the concentration or error code, sample temperature, lamp
spectrum, absorbance spectrum and FFT spectrum.

7 1 6 8 9 10

4 31

3
32

20
11
30
21
12 22
23
13 24
25

14 26
27

15 28

16 19 18 17 29

Release A Page 144 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit, as well as the sample temperature read
during the measurement.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or the cleaning pump or the ultrasonic cleaning (if any).

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 145 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 HCl pump button

Pressing on this button starts the HCl pump for testing purpose or to fill the tubing after
installation. The pump will stop automatically after 10 seconds.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Measuring cycle steps display

During a measuring cycle, this area displays the different steps of the cycle with an associated
countdown timer or counter.
During the ammonia measurements, the steps are:

1) Purging: the gas flow cell is purged by external ambient air

2) Zeroing: the reference spectrum on air is acquired

3) Sampling: the sample is renewed inside in the stripping pot

4) Reagent: the HCl is added to the sample inside the stripping pot

5) Stripping: the gas flow cell is placed in a close loop with the stripping pot

6) Measuring: the spectrum is acquired on the gas coming through the sample, and then the
concentration is computed and displayed

7) Purging: the gas flow cell is purged again by external ambient air to remove humidity

8 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “calibration” section.

Release A Page 146 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

9 Signal graph

This graph displays the lamp spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is updated during
the measuring cycle when the lamp is flashing.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

The signal must not be saturated (below 2000 mV) for the wavelengths used by the
measurement, that are below 225 nm.

It’s recommended to have a signal at 210 nm around 500 mV to get a good repeatability, but
measurement can still be done for signal as low as 100 mV if the repeatability is less critical.

If the light signal is too high, an alarm message is displayed on the top left corner.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

Release A Page 147 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Absorbance spectrum

This graph displays the absorbance spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is displayed
in light grey during a measuring cycle until updated.

For more details or to investigate about the absorbance spectrum, press anywhere on the graph
to zoom it as below:

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows located above the Y axis.

Release A Page 148 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

12 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The unit size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Display mode

This button allows selecting the concentration display mode as H2S (default mode) or as S of
H2S.
If S-H2S is selected, the H2S concentrations are multiplied by 32/34=0.941 before displaying
and the label is automatically updated to “S-H2S”.
The measurements previously stored in the internal memory will keep their values in H2S.

14 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

15 Number of decimal

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

Release A Page 149 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

16 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

17 Temperature adjustment

The temperature of the sample given by the internal temperature probe can be adjusted by this
field. This adjustment is not important as any difference of temperature is taken in account
during the calibration. But if this value is changed, a new calibration must be done.

18 Temperature coefficient

The sample temperature affects directly the H2S liquid/gas ratio. This coefficient is used for the
temperature compensation. It can be change only by the manufacturer.

19 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 150 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

Release A Page 151 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

20 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

21 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

22 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

23 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

24 Reaction time

This field allows changing the stripping time before measuring.

Release A Page 152 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Precautions must be taken before changing this value.


It can be use very exceptionally in case of change of pump or for special experimentation.

25 Reagent time

This field allows changing the reagent pumping.

Precautions must be taken before changing this value.


It can be use exceptionally in case of special sample with high salinity.

26 Peak wavelength

This field allows changing the peak wavelength taken in account for the measurement. It
corresponds to the absorbance peak of H2S.

It can be changed exceptionally to avoid a known interference or to decrease the sensitivity.

27 Peak width

This field allows changing the width band of the peak wavelength taken in account for the
measurement.

It may be exceptionally enlarged or reduced to avoid a known interference.

28 Reference wavelength

This field allows changing the reference wavelength taken in account for the measurement.
It corresponds normally to a wavelength where the H2S doesn’t absorb.

It can be changed exceptionally to avoid a known interference or to decrease the sensitivity.

29 Reference width

This field allows changing the width band of the reference wavelength taken in account for the
measurement.

It may be exceptionally enlarged or reduced to avoid a known interference.

Release A Page 153 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

30 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

31 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0,0
as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these points.

32 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

Release A Page 154 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.8 .3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated. However, periodical checking is recommended and a


recalibration might be necessary after several months depending of the conditions of use.

To recalibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Prepare a 10 mg/l H2S standard. For this weight 2.434 g of dried Na2S and dilute in 1litre of
distilled water to obtain a mere solution of 1g/l. Then take 10 ml of this mere solution and
complete to 1 litre of distilled water.

- Do at least 3 manual measurements on this 10 mg/l standard using the check screen. The last
two measurements must be close together with less than 5% of difference.

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen (as describe above) and then enter the
standard value on the keypad.

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 155 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.9 Input 4-20 mA

4.9.1 Principle

The 4-20mA input give in percent the current value on a 4-20 mA loop connected to another
instrument. The load resistance is 100 ohm.

4.9.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.
If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The input value, signals and history graph are
continuously updated.

1 6 7 8 9 10

2
17
11 24
18
12 21
19
13
20
14

15

16 22 23

Release A Page 156 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit.

During an automatic measuring cycle, the measured value is display in light green until replaced
by the new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

This button is not used for this parameter.

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stops the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Release A Page 157 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

7 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Assume first that the connected device gives a zero measurement.


Alternatively, connect a 4 mA generator on the input.

8 Scale button

This button is used for calibrating the connected device on a high value.

To avoid a wrong calibration, calibrate first the connected device on the zero point
(as described above).

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

9 Signal value

This area displays the signal in mV read on the input of the 4-20 mA input module.

Release A Page 158 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Input history graph

This area displays the 4-20 mA input value over the last 500 acquisitions, starting when the
check screen appears.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 159 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

12 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

14 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

15 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

Release A Page 160 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

16 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

Release A Page 161 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

17 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

18 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

19 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

20 Offset

This field show the internal offset applied on the signal for the zeroing.
It is updated at each zeroing and has not to be changed.
It can be used for troubleshooting by the manufacturer.

21 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

Release A Page 162 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

22 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

23 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

It is necessary only if the connected device needs a linearization curve.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

24 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

Release A Page 163 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.9.3 Recalibration

The 4-20 mA input can be recalibrated to take in account a drift of the connected device.

To recalibrate the input, proceed as follow:

- Assume that the connected device is measuring a zero standard (or alternatively replace by a
4 mA generator)

- Do a manual measurement using the check screen (as describe above) then press on the
ZERO key.

- Assume that the connected device is measuring a known standard (or alternatively replace by
a 20 mA generator)

- Do a manual measurement using the check screen, then press on the SCALE key and enter
the standard value on the keypad.

The calibration is finished. New offset and calibration factors has been calculated and has been
recorded inside the zero and calibration history displayed on the check screen.

These new calibration factors will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 164 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.10 Nitrate by filters

4.10.1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the UV light absorption around 220 nm according to the
Beer-Lambert law:

[C ] = k ⋅ log I 0 
 I1 

With [C ] : Sample concentration


k: Absorption coefficient (molecule specific)
I0: Light intensity before the sample
I1 : Light intensity after of the sample

The UV light is generated by a pulsed xenon lamp to reach an ultra long life time.

The light detection is performed by two photodiode detectors through interferential filters; one
centred on the nitrate absorption band while the other is used as reference to compensate
organic matter, turbidity or deposit inside the flow cell.

1 Xenon flash lamp


2 Sample flow cell
3 Beam splitter
4 Peak interferential filter
5 Peak photo detector
6 Reference interferential filter
7 Reference photo detector

Release A Page 165 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.10.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration or error code corresponds to the
last measurement done, while the signals are continuously updated.

7 1 6 8 9 10 11 12 13

2
21
14 29
22
15 26
23
16
24

17

18

19 20 25 27 28

Release A Page 166 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 167 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Measuring cycle steps display

During a measuring cycle or a zeroing cycle, this area displays a counter of the elemental
acquisitions preceded by the message “measuring…” or “zeroing…” respectively.

8 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water inside the flow cell before pressing on this button.

Note: an auto-zero is performed automatically during each acid cleaning if this option is selected
on the timing screen.

9 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

Release A Page 168 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Photo detector no 1 (PH1) signal

This window displays the photo detector 1 (PH1) signal continuously. This signal corresponds to
the light absorbed by the nitrate.

On pure water, the signal must normally be in a 500 mV to 2000 mV range.

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.

11 Photo detector no 2 (PH2) signal

This window displays the photo detector 2 (PH2) signal continuously. This signal corresponds to
the reference light that is not absorbed by the nitrate. It is use to compensate turbidity or organic
matter or deposit on the flow cell.

On pure water, the signal must normally be in a 200 mV to 2000 mV range.

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.

Release A Page 169 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

12 Photo detector no 1 Signal graph

This graph displays the PH1 signal continuously updated. This signal corresponds to the light
absorbed by the nitrate.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

The average signal value in mV and its standard deviation (sigma) on the last 500 acquisitions
are displayed on the bottom right of the screen.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows. After reading, restart the
acquisitions by pressing on the “play” button if necessary.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 170 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

13 Photo detector 2 signal graph

This graph displays the photo detector no 2 (PH2) signal continuously updated. This signal
corresponds to the reference light through the sample.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it.
Refer to photo detector no 2 signal graph for the zoom display.

14 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

15 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

16 Display mode

This button allows selecting the concentration display mode as NO3 (default mode) or as N of
NO3.
If N-NO3 is selected, the NO3 concentrations are multiplied by 14/62=0.2258 before displaying
and the label is automatically updated to “N-NO3”.
The measurements previously stored in the internal memory will keep their original values.

17 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

Release A Page 171 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

18 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

19 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

20 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 172 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

21 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

Release A Page 173 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

22 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

23 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

24 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

25 Offset

This field show the internal offset applied on the signal for the zeroing.
It is updated at each zeroing and has not to be changed.
It can be used for troubleshooting by the manufacturer.

26 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

27 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

Release A Page 174 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

28 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

29 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

4.10.3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated. However, periodical checking is recommended and a


recalibration might be necessary after several months depending of the conditions of use.

To recalibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Prepare a 50 mg/l NO3 standard. For this weight 1.629 g of dried KNO3 and dilute in 1litre of
distilled water to obtain a mere solution of 1g/l. Then take 50 ml of this mere solution and
complete to 1 litre of distilled water.

- Do a manual measurement on this standard using the check screen (as describe above).

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen and then enter the standard value on the
keypad.

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 175 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.11 Nitrate by spectrograph

4.11.1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the UV light absorption around 220 nm according to the
Beer-Lambert law:

[C ] = k ⋅ log I 0 
 I1 

With [C ] : Sample concentration


k: Absorption coefficient (molecule specific)
I0: Light intensity before the sample
I1 : Light intensity after of the sample

The UV light is generated by a pulsed xenon lamp to reach an ultra long life time.
The absorption spectrum is performed by a concave grating coupled to a 2048 pixels CCD
(Charge-Coupled Device).

A double-wavelength algorithm allows compensating the turbidity or a deposit inside the flow
cell.

1 Xenon flash lamp


2 Sample flow cell
3 Spectrograph with concave grating and CCD detector

Release A Page 176 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.11.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration or error code corresponds to the
last measurement done, as well as the signal and absorbance graphs.

7 1 6 8 9 10 11

2
19
12 30
20
13 27
21
14
22

15

16

17 18 23 24 25 26 28 29

Release A Page 177 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 178 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Measuring cycle steps display

During a measuring cycle or a zeroing cycle, this area displays a counter of the elemental
acquisitions preceded by the message “measuring…” or “zeroing…” respectively.

8 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water inside the flow cell before pressing on this button.

Note: an auto-zero is performed automatically during each acid cleaning if this option is selected
on the timing screen.

9 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

Release A Page 179 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Signal graph

This graph displays the lamp spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is updated during
the measuring cycle when the lamp is flashing.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

To acquire again the lamp signal, press on the “play” button.

With pure water inside the flow cell, the signal must not be saturated (below 2000 mV) on the
two wavelengths bands used for the absorbance calculation defined as “Peak wavelength” and
“Ref wavelength” on the check screen. Otherwise, an error will occur during the measuring
cycle.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 180 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Absorbance spectrum

This graph displays the absorbance spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is displayed
in light grey during a measuring cycle until updated.

For more details or to investigate about the absorbance spectrum, press anywhere on the graph
to zoom it as below:

The average absorbance for the peak wavelength band and for the reference wavelength band
are represented by a green line and displayed above the curve.

The difference is used to calculate the final concentration.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 181 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

12 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

14 Display mode

This button allows selecting the concentration display mode as NO3 (default mode) or as N of
NO3.
If N-NO3 is selected, the NO3 concentrations are multiplied by 14/62=0.2258 before displaying
and the label is automatically updated to “N-NO3”.
The measurements previously stored in the internal memory will keep their original values.

15 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

16 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

Release A Page 182 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

17 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

18 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 183 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

19 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

Release A Page 184 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

20 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

21 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

22 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

23 Peak wavelength

This field allows changing the peak wavelength taken in account for the measurement. It
corresponds to a wavelength absorbed by nitrate.

The default value is 220 nm. It can be changed exceptionally to avoid a known interference or to
reduce the sensitivity for high range measurements.

24 Peak width

This field allows changing the width band of the peak wavelength taken in account for the
measurement.

It may be exceptionally enlarged or reduced to avoid a known interference.

Release A Page 185 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

25 Reference wavelength

This field allows changing the reference wavelength taken in account for the measurement.
It corresponds normally to a wavelength where the nitrate doesn’t absorb.

The default value is 254 nm to compensate the organic matter. It can be changed exceptionally
to avoid a known interference.

26 Reference width

This field allows changing the width band of the reference wavelength taken in account for the
measurement.

It may be exceptionally enlarged or reduced to avoid a known interference.

27 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

28 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

29 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

Release A Page 186 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

27 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

4.11.3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated. However, periodical checking is recommended and a


recalibration might be necessary after several months depending of the conditions of use.

To recalibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Prepare a 50 mg/l NO3 standard. For this weight 1.629 g of dried KNO3 and dilute in 1litre of
distilled water to obtain a mere solution of 1g/l. Then take 50 ml of this mere solution and
complete to 1 litre of distilled water.

- Do a manual measurement on this standard using the check screen (as describe above).

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen and then enter the standard value on the
keypad.

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 187 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.12 Oxidation-reduction potential (ORP)

4.12.1 Principle

The reduction potential is a measure of the tendency of the solution to either gain or lose
electrons when it is subject to change by introduction of a new species.

A solution with a higher (more positive) reduction potential than the new species will have a
tendency to gain electrons from the new species (i.e. to be reduced by oxidizing the new
species) and a solution with a lower (more negative) reduction potential will have a tendency to
lose electrons to the new species (i.e. to be oxidized by reducing the new species).

The method of measurement is based on the potential between two half-cells (reference and
sensing) containing a conductor immersed in an appropriate electrolyte solution and ended by a
conductive glass membrane. These two half-cells are generally combined in a single body
electrode.

1 Internal electrode 4 Internal electrolyte solution


2 Reference electrode 5 Glass bulb
3 Reference electrolyte solution

Release A Page 188 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.12.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration (or error code), signals and history
graph are continuously updated.

1 6 7 8 9 10

2
17
11 24
18
12 21
19
13
20
14

15

16 22 23

Release A Page 189 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit.

During an automatic measuring cycle, the measured value is display in light green until
replaced by the new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

This button is not used for this parameter.

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stops the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Release A Page 190 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

7 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water inside the flow cell before pressing on this button.
Alternatively, replace the electrode by a strap.

8 Scale button

This button is used for calibrating the electrode on a high value.

Wait that the electrode stabilizes on the standard before calibrating. It may take
several minutes.

To avoid a wrong calibration, calibrate first the electrode on the low value point (as
described above).

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

9 Signal value

This area displays the ORP signal in mV read on the input of the pH module.

Release A Page 191 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 ORP history graph

This area displays the pH value over the last 500 acquisitions, starting when the check screen
appears.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 192 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

12 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

14 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

15 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

Release A Page 193 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

16 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

Release A Page 194 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

17 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

18 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

19 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

20 Offset

This field show the internal offset applied on the signal for the zeroing.
It is updated at each zeroing and has not to be changed.
It can be used for troubleshooting by the manufacturer.

21 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

Release A Page 195 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

22 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

23 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

Normally, no linearity correction is necessary for the ORP measurement.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

24 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

Release A Page 196 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.12.3 Recalibration

The ORP electrode must be checked on a regular base depending on the condition of use, and
recalibrated if necessary.

To recalibrate the electrode, proceed as follow:

- Put the electrode in a zero buffer solution (or alternatively replace the electrode by a strap)

- Do manual measurement on this buffer using the check screen (as describe above), wait for
the stabilisation of the ORP value, then press on the ZERO key.

- Put the electrode in a standard buffer solution

- Do manual measurement on this buffer using the check screen, wait for the stabilisation of the
pH value, then press on the SCALE key and enter the standard value on the keypad.

The calibration is finished. New offset and calibration factors has been calculated and has been
recorded inside the zero and calibration history displayed on the check screen.

These new calibration factors will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 197 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.13 pH

4.13.1 Principle

The pH of a solution is the negative logarithm of the molar concentration of dissolved hydronium
ions (H3O+).

The method of measurement is based on the potential between two half-cells (reference and
sensing) containing a conductor immersed in an appropriate electrolyte solution and ended by a
conductive glass membrane. These two half-cells are generally combined in a single body
electrode.
The voltage between the half-cell follows the Nernst equation:

V = V0 + 2,3
RT [
H +m
⋅ log +
]
nF [H ref ]
With V0: voltage of the reference half-cell, R: ideal gas constant, T: absolute temperature, n
:valence, F: Faraday constant, H+m: concentration of H+ in the measured solution, H+ref:
reference concentration of H+.

At 25ºC, one pH unit corresponds to 59.16 mV. At pH 7, the output is 0V (for all temperatures).

As pH depends of temperature, a temperature sensor is generally include in the electrode (100


Ohm or 1000 Ohm Platinum resistor) and connected to the instrument for automatic
temperature compensation (ATC).

1 Internal electrode 4 Internal electrolyte solution


2 Reference electrode 5 Glass bulb
3 Reference electrolyte solution

Release A Page 198 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.13.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration (or error code), signals and history
graph are continuously updated.

1 6 7 8 9 10

2
18
11 25
19
12 22
20
13
21
14

15

16
17 23 24

Release A Page 199 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit.

During an automatic measuring cycle, the measured value is display in light green until replaced
by the new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

This button is not used for this parameter.

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stops the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Release A Page 200 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

7 Low button

This button is used for calibrating the measurement on a low value, for example a buffer
solution of 4.0 pH.

Wait that the electrode stabilizes on the standard before calibrating. It may take
several minutes.

A new offset is automatically calculated after entering the standard value.


The zeroing history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the new
offset calculated.

8 High button

This button is used for calibrating the measurement on a high value, for example a buffer
solution of 10.0 pH.

Wait that the electrode stabilizes on the standard before calibrating. It may take
several minutes.

To avoid a wrong calibration, calibrate first the electrode on the low value point (as
described above).

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

9 Signal value

This area displays the pH signal in mV read on the input of the pH module. It corresponds to a
theoretical value of 0 mV for a pH of 7, -414 mV for a pH of 14 and +414 mV for a pH of 0.

Release A Page 201 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 pH history graph

This area displays the pH value over the last 500 acquisitions, starting when the check screen
appears.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 202 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

12 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

14 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

15 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

Release A Page 203 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

16 Temperature adjustment

The temperature of the sample given by the internal temperature probe can be adjusted by this
field. This adjustment is not important as any difference of temperature is taken in account
during the calibration. But if this value is changed significantly, a new calibration must be done.

17 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 204 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

18 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

19 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

20 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

21 Offset

This field show the internal offset applied on the signal for the zeroing.
It is updated at each zeroing and has not to be changed.

Release A Page 205 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

It can be used for troubleshooting by the manufacturer.

22 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

23 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

24 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

Normally, no linearity correction is necessary for the pH measurement.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

25 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

Release A Page 206 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.13.3 Recalibration

The pH electrode must be checked on a regular base depending on the condition of use, and
recalibrated if necessary.

To recalibrate the electrode, proceed as follow:

- Put the electrode in a pH 4.0 buffer solution

- Do manual measurement on this buffer using the check screen (as describe above), wait for
the stabilisation of the pH value, then press on the LOW key and enter the standard value on
the keypad.

- Put the electrode in a pH 10.0 buffer solution

- Do manual measurement on this buffer using the check screen, wait for the stabilisation of the
pH value, then press on the HIGH key and enter the standard value on the keypad.

The calibration is finished. New offset and calibration factors has been calculated and has been
recorded inside the zero and calibration history displayed on the check screen.

These new calibration factors will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 207 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.14 Phosphate by LED

4.14 .1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on colorimetry. A small quantity of reagent is injected on the
sample and after a fixed reaction time the developed colour is measured by the light absorption
according to the Beer-Lambert law:

[C ] = k ⋅ log I 0 
 I1 

With [C ] : Sample concentration


k: Absorption coefficient (molecule specific)
I0: Light intensity before the sample
I1 : Light intensity after of the sample

A second light beam is used to compensate the turbidity of the sample or an eventual deposit
inside the flow cell.
The light is generated alternatively by two LEDs.

1 Red LED (peak) 3 Flow cell


2 Blue LED (reference) 4 Photo detector
5 Reagent pump 6 Reagent tank

Release A Page 208 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.14 .2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration or error code corresponds to the
last measurement done, while signal values and graph are updated continuously.

1 7 8 9 10 11 12
6

3
28
2

13 22 30

14 23

24
15
25
16
26
17
27
18

21 20 19 29

Release A Page 209 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measurement window
1

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit, as well as the standard deviation (sigma)
obtained on the elemental acquisitions.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 210 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Reagent pump button

Pressing on this button starts the reagent pump for testing purpose or to fill the tubing after
installation. The pump will stop automatically after 10 seconds.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

8 LED 1 signal

This window displays the LED1 signal continuously. This signal corresponds to the light that can
be absorbed by the colour developed inside the sample.

On pure water, the signal must normally be in a 1000 to 2000 mV range (value below 500 mV
might deteriorate the repeatability while values above 2500 mV might cause an error for light
saturation).

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.
It might be caused by ambient light if the door of the analyser is opened with a high level of
ambient light (sun, daylight).

9 LED 2 signal

This window displays the LED2 signal continuously. This signal corresponds to the reference
light that is not absorbed by the colour developed inside the sample.

Release A Page 211 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

On pure water or with a sample without turbidity, the signal must normally be in a 1000 to
2000 mV range (value below 500 mV might deteriorate significantly the repeatability while
values above 2500 mV might cause an error for light saturation).

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.
It might be caused by ambient light if the door of the analyser is opened with a high level of
ambient light (sun, daylight) or by an optical misalignment.

10 LED1 Signal graph

This graph displays the LED1 signal continuously updated. This signal corresponds to the light
that can be absorbed by the colour developed inside the sample.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

Release A Page 212 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The average signal value in mV and its standard deviation (sigma) on the last 500 acquisitions
are displayed on the bottom right of the screen.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows. After reading, restart the
acquisitions by pressing on the “play” button if necessary.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

11 LED2 Signal graph

This graph displays the LED2 signal continuously updated. This signal corresponds to the
reference light that is not absorbed by the colour developed inside the sample.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it.
Refer to LED1 signal graph for the zoom display.

Release A Page 213 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

12 Reaction graph

This graph shows the PO4 measured concentration all along the reaction time for checking the
reaction development.

13 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

14 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

Release A Page 214 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

15 Display mode

This button allows selecting the concentration display mode as P of PO4 (default mode) or as
PO4.
If P-PO4 is selected, the PO4 concentrations are multiplied by 32/96=0.3333 before displaying
and the label is automatically updated to “P-PO4”.
The measurements previously stored in the internal memory will keep their original values.

16 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

17 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

18 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

Release A Page 215 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

19 Temperature adjustment

The temperature of the sample given by the internal temperature probe can be adjusted by this
field. This adjustment is not important as any difference of temperature is taken in account
during the calibration. But if this value is changed significantly, a new calibration must be done.

20 Temperature coefficient

The colorimetric result is slightly affected by the temperature. This coefficient is used for the
temperature compensation.

21 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 216 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

22 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

Release A Page 217 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

23 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

24 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

25 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

26 Reaction time

This field allows changing the reaction time before measuring.

Precautions must be taken before changing this value as an incomplete reaction time can affect
the result.

27 Reagent time

This field allows changing the reagent pumping.

Precautions must be taken before changing this value as improper reagent concentration might
affect the result.

Release A Page 218 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

28 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

29 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

30 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

4.14 .3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated. However, periodical checking is recommended and a


recalibration might be necessary after several months depending of the conditions of use.

To recalibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Prepare a 1 mg/l P-PO4 standard. For this weight 4.39 g of dried potassium phosphate
(KH2PO4) and dilute in 1litre of distilled water to obtain a mere solution of 1g/l NH4.

Then take 1 ml of this mere solution and complete to 1 litre of distilled water.

- Do a manual measurement on this standard using the check screen (as describe above).

Release A Page 219 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen and then enter the standard value on the
keypad.

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 220 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.15 Phosphate by spectrograph

4.15 .1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on colorimetry. A small quantity of reagent is injected on the
sample and after a fixed reaction time the developed colour is measured by the light absorption
according to the Beer-Lambert law:

[C ] = k ⋅ log I 0 
 I1 

With [C ] : Sample concentration


k: Absorption coefficient (molecule specific)
I0: Light intensity before the sample
I1 : Light intensity after of the sample

The light is generated by a pulsed xenon lamp to reach an ultra long life time.

The absorption spectrum is performed by a concave grating coupled to a 2048 pixels CCD
(Charge-Coupled Device).

1 Xenon lamp 4 Reagent pump


2 Flow cell 5 Reagent tank
3 Spectrograph

Release A Page 221 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.15 .2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration or error code corresponds to the
last measurement done, as well as the signal graph and reaction graph.

1 7 8 9 10
6

3
30
2

11 20 32

12 21

22
13
23
14
24
15
25
16
26
31
17 19 18 29 28 27

Release A Page 222 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measurement window
1

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit, as well as the standard deviation (sigma)
obtained on the elemental acquisitions.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 223 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Reagent pump button

Pressing on this button starts the reagent pump for testing purpose or to fill the tubing after
installation. The pump will stop automatically after 10 seconds.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

Release A Page 224 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

8 Signal graph

This graph displays the lamp spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is updated during
the measuring cycle when the lamp is flashing.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

To acquire again the lamp signal, press on the “play” button.

With pure water inside the flow cell, the signal must not be saturated (below 2000 mV) on the
two wavelengths bands used for the absorbance calculation defined as “Peak wavelength” and
“Ref wavelength” on the check screen. Otherwise, an error will occur during the measuring
cycle.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 225 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

9 Absorbance spectrum

This graph displays the absorbance spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is displayed
in light grey during a measuring cycle until updated.

For more details or to investigate about the absorbance spectrum, press anywhere on the graph
to zoom it as below:

The average absorbance for the peak wavelength band and for the reference wavelength band
are represented by a green line and displayed above the curve.

The difference is used to calculate the final concentration.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 226 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Reaction graph

This graph shows the PO4 measured concentration all along the reaction time for checking the
reaction development.

11 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

12 Unit

Release A Page 227 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Display mode

This button allows selecting the concentration display mode as P of PO4 (default mode) or as
PO4.
If P-PO4 is selected, the PO4 concentrations are multiplied by 32/96=0.3333 before displaying
and the label is automatically updated to “P-PO4”.
The measurements previously stored in the internal memory will keep their original values.

14 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

15 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

16 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

Release A Page 228 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

17 Temperature adjustment

The temperature of the sample given by the internal temperature probe can be adjusted by this
field. This adjustment is not important as any difference of temperature is taken in account
during the calibration. But if this value is changed significantly, a new calibration must be done.

18 Temperature coefficient

The colorimetric result is slightly affected by the temperature. This coefficient is used for the
temperature compensation.

19 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 229 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

20 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

Release A Page 230 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

21 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

22 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

23 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

24 Reaction time

This field allows changing the reaction time before measuring.

Precautions must be taken before changing this value as an incomplete reaction time can affect
the result.

25 Reagent time

This field allows changing the reagent pumping.

Precautions must be taken before changing this value as improper reagent concentration might
affect the result.

Release A Page 231 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

26 Peak wavelength

This field allows changing the peak wavelength taken in account for the measurement. It
corresponds to a wavelength absorbed by developed colour inside the sample.

It can be changed exceptionally to avoid a known interference or to reduce the sensitivity.

27 Peak width

This field allows changing the width band of the peak wavelength taken in account for the
measurement.

It may be exceptionally enlarged or reduced to avoid a known interference.

28 Reference wavelength

This field allows changing the reference wavelength taken in account for the measurement.
It corresponds normally to a wavelength where developed colour inside the sample doesn’t
absorb.

It can be changed exceptionally to avoid a known interference.

29 Reference width

This field allows changing the width band of the reference wavelength taken in account for the
measurement.

It may be exceptionally enlarged or reduced to avoid a known interference.

30 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

Release A Page 232 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

31 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

32 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

4.15 .3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated. However, periodical checking is recommended and a


recalibration might be necessary after several months depending of the conditions of use.

To recalibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Prepare a 1 mg/l P-PO4 standard. For this weight 4.39 g of dried potassium phosphate
(KH2PO4) and dilute in 1litre of distilled water to obtain a mere solution of 1g/l NH4.

Then take 1 ml of this mere solution and complete to 1 litre of distilled water.

- Do a manual measurement on this standard using the check screen (as describe above).

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen and then enter the standard value on the
keypad.

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 233 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.16 Rhodamine

4.16 .1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the orange light fluorescence that is a typical characteristic
of the Rhodamine.

The light is generated by a pulsed xenon lamp to reach an ultra long life time.
The excitation filter limits the bandwidth of the excitation light, while the emission filter selects
the specific fluorescent light.

The detection is done by a high sensitivity photomultiplier.

A second detector (optional) is used to compensate the eventual absorbance of the sample due
to turbidity.

1 Xenon UV lamp 4 Emission filter


2 Excitation filter 5 Photomultiplier
3 Flow cell 6 Photo detector

Release A Page 234 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.16 .2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration or error code corresponds to the
last measurement done, while signal values and graph are updated continuously.

1 7 8 9 10 11 12
6

13 21 30

14 22

23
15

16

17

18

19 20 24 25 26 27 28 29

Release A Page 235 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit, as well as the sample temperature and
standard deviation (sigma) obtained on the elemental acquisitions.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 236 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

8 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water inside the flow cell before pressing on this button.

Note: an auto-zero is performed automatically during each acid cleaning if this option is selected
on the timing screen.

Release A Page 237 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

9 PM signal

This window displays the PM signal continuously. This signal corresponds to the fluorescent
light re-emitted by the Rhodamine.

On pure water, this signal is normally close to zero with fluctuations of a few tens of mV.

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.

It might be caused by an over-range concentration of the sample or by the ambient light if the
door of the analyser is opened with a high level of ambient light (sun, daylight).

10 Photo detector signal

This window displays the photo detector signal continuously (optional). This signal corresponds
to the excitation light of the sample. It is use to compensate an eventual absorption of the
excitation blue light by the sample, for example due to turbidity.

On pure water, the signal must normally be in a 200 mV to 2000 mV range.

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.
It might be caused by ambient light if the door of the analyser is opened with a high level of
ambient light (sun, daylight).

Release A Page 238 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 PM Signal graph

This graph displays the PM signal continuously updated. This signal corresponds to the
fluorescent light re-emitted by the Rhodamine.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

The average signal value in mV and its standard deviation (sigma) on the last 500 acquisitions
are displayed on the bottom right of the screen.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows. After reading, restart the
acquisitions by pressing on the “play” button if necessary.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 239 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

12 Photo detector signal graph

This graph displays the photo detector signal continuously updated. This signal corresponds to
the excitation light of the sample.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it.
Refer to PM signal graph for the zoom display.

13 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

14 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

15 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

16 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

Release A Page 240 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

17 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

18 Temperature adjustment

The temperature of the sample given by the internal temperature probe can be adjusted by this
field. This adjustment is not important as any difference of temperature is taken in account
during the calibration. But if this value is changed, a new calibration must be done.

19 Temperature coefficient

The fluorescence is affected by the temperature. This coefficient is used for the temperature
compensation.

20 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 241 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

Release A Page 242 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

21 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

22 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

23 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

24 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

25 Turbidity factor

This field enable a compensation of the excitation light loses due to turbidity.
A value of 1.0 corresponds to a basic compensation.

Release A Page 243 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

26 Offset

This field show the internal offset applied on the signal for the zeroing.
It is updated at each zeroing and has not to be changed.
It can be used for troubleshooting by the manufacturer.

27 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

28 Last zeros window

This window displays the 10 last zeros done with the date, time and zero value adjustment,
whatever manually or by an automatic cleaning cycle.

Note: a strong zero adjustment value might reveal an abnormal zeroing operation.

29 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

30 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

Release A Page 244 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.16 .3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated. However, periodical checking is recommended and a


recalibration might be necessary after several months depending of the conditions of use.

To recalibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Prepare a 1 mg/l standard of Rhodamine

- Do a manual measurement using the check screen (as described above)

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen and then enter the standard value

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 245 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.17 UV-VIS spectrum

4.17.1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the full UV-visible light absorption according to the Beer-
Lambert law:

[C ] = k ⋅ log I 0 
 I1 

With [C ] : Sample concentration


k: Absorption coefficient (molecule specific)
I0: Light intensity before the sample
I1 : Light intensity after of the sample

The light is generated by a pulsed xenon lamp to reach an ultra long life time.
The absorption spectrum is performed by a concave grating coupled to a 2048 pixels CCD
(Charge-Coupled Device).

1 Xenon flash lamp


2 Sample flow cell
3 Spectrograph with concave grating and CCD detector

Release A Page 246 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.17.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed.

7 1 6 8 9 10

11 13

12
14

15

Release A Page 247 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays only the label and unit as no measured value is attached to the full UV-
VIS spectrum. In case of a measuring error, the error code is written, refer to troubleshooting
section.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 248 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Measuring cycle steps display

During a measuring cycle or a zeroing cycle, this area displays a counter of the elemental
acquisitions preceded by the message “measuring…” or “zeroing…” respectively.

8 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water inside the flow cell before pressing on this button.

Note: an auto-zero is performed automatically during each acid cleaning if this option is selected
on the timing screen.

Release A Page 249 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

9 Signal graph

This graph displays the lamp spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is updated during
the measuring cycle when the lamp is flashing.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

To acquire again the lamp signal, press on the “play” button.

With pure water inside the flow cell, the signal must not be saturated (below 2000 mV) over the
full spectrum, otherwise, an error will occur during the measuring cycle.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 250 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Absorbance spectrum

This graph displays the absorbance spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is displayed
in light grey during a measuring cycle until updated.

For more details or to investigate about the absorbance spectrum, press anywhere on the graph
to zoom it as below:

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 251 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

12 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

14 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

15 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

Release A Page 252 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.18 Temperature

4.18.1 Principle

The temperature measurement is based on the resistance measurement of a standard platinum


element of 100 ohm at 0°C (Pt100). This element is generally included in a pH or conductivity
electrode.

The table below shows the Pt 100 resistance in ohm for temperature between 0°C and 100°C.

°C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 100.00 100.39 100.78 101.17 101.56 101.95 102.34 102.73 103.12 103.51
10 103.90 104.29 104.68 105.07 105.46 105.85 106.24 106.63 107.02 107.40
20 107.79 108.18 108.57 108.96 109.35 109.73 110.12 110.51 110.90 111.28
30 111.67 112.06 112.45 112.83 113.22 113.61 113.99 114.38 114.77 115.15
40 115.54 115.93 116.31 116.70 117.08 117.47 117.85 118.24 118.62 119.01
50 119.40 119.78 120.16 120.55 120.93 121.32 121.70 122.09 122.47 122.86
60 123.24 123.62 124.01 124.39 124.77 125.16 125.54 125.92 126.31 126.69
70 127.07 127.45 127.84 128.22 128.60 128.98 129.37 129.75 130.13 130.51
80 130.89 131.27 131.66 132.04 132.42 132.80 133.18 133.56 133.94 134.32
90 134.70 135.08 135.46 135.84 136.22 136.60 136.98 137.36 137.74 138.12

Release A Page 253 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.18.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The temperature (or error code), signals and history
graph are continuously updated.

1 6 7 8 9 10

2
18
11 25
19
12 22
20
13
21
14

15

16
17 23 24

Release A Page 254 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit.

During an automatic measuring cycle, the measured value is display in light green until replaced
by the new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

This button is not used for this parameter.

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stops the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Release A Page 255 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

7 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first the temperature element at 0°C in a Dewar filled with ice and water.

8 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the temperature element with a reference thermometer.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

9 Signal value

This area displays the signal in mV read on the temperature channel of the electrode module.

Release A Page 256 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Temperature history graph

This area displays the temperature over the last 500 acquisitions, starting when the check
screen appears.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 257 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

12 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

14 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

15 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

Release A Page 258 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

16 Temperature adjustment

The temperature can be adjusted with a reference thermometer without doing a complete
calibration by entering an offset value in this field.

17 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 259 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

18 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

19 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

20 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

21 Offset

This field show the internal offset applied on the signal for the zeroing.
It is updated at each zeroing and has not to be changed.

Release A Page 260 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

It can be used for troubleshooting by the manufacturer.

22 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

23 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

24 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

Normally, no linearity correction is necessary for the temperature measurement on the water
temperature range 0 to 100°C.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

25 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

Release A Page 261 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.18.3 Recalibration

The temperature probe is factory calibrated with an accuracy of +/- 1°C. It can be recalibrated if
a higher accuracy is requested.

To recalibrate the electrode, proceed as follow:

- Put the temperature probe in a Dewar filled of ice and water

- Do manual measurement using the check screen (as describe above), wait for the stabilisation
of the temperature value, and then press on the ZERO key.

- Put the temperature probe in a Dewar filled of water at a temperature between 50°C and 80°C
with a reference thermometer inside

- Do manual measurement using the check screen, wait for the stabilisation of the temperature
value, then press on the SCALE key and enter the value given by the reference thermometer on
the keypad.

The calibration is finished. New offset and calibration factors has been calculated and has been
recorded inside the zero and calibration history displayed on the check screen.

These new calibration factors will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 262 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.19 Turbidity by UV absorption with filter

4.19.1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the UV light absorption according to the Beer-Lambert law:

[C ] = k ⋅ log I 0 
 I1 

With [C ] : Sample concentration


k: Absorption coefficient (molecule specific)
I0: Light intensity before the sample
I1 : Light intensity after of the sample

The UV light is generated by a pulsed xenon lamp to reach an ultra long life time.

The light detection is performed by a photodiode detector through an interferential filter that
generally reuse to the reference light for the nitrate or UV254 measurement.

1 Xenon flash lamp


2 Sample flow cell
3 Peak interferential filter
4 Photo detector

Release A Page 263 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.19.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration or error code corresponds to the
last measurement done, while the signal and signal graph are continuously updated.

7 1 6 8 9 10 11

2
18
12 25
19
13 22
20
14
21

15

16

17 23 24

Release A Page 264 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 265 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Measuring cycle steps display

During a measuring cycle or a zeroing cycle, this area displays a counter of the elemental
acquisitions preceded by the message “measuring…” or “zeroing…” respectively.

8 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water inside the flow cell before pressing on this button.

Note: an auto-zero is performed automatically during each acid cleaning if this option is selected
on the timing screen.

9 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

Release A Page 266 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Photo detector no 1 (PH1) signal

This window displays the photo detector 1 (PH1) signal continuously. This signal corresponds to
the light absorbed by the nitrate.
On pure water, the signal must normally be in a 500 mV to 2000 mV range.

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.

11 Signal graph

This graph displays the light signal absorbed by the turbidity continuously.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

Release A Page 267 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The average signal value in mV and its standard deviation (sigma) on the last 500 acquisitions
are displayed on the bottom right of the screen.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows. After reading, restart the
acquisitions by pressing on the “play” button if necessary.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

12 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

14 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

15 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

Release A Page 268 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

16 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

17 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 269 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

18 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

Release A Page 270 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

19 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

20 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

21 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

22 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

23 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

24 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

Release A Page 271 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

25 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

4.19.3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated. However, periodical checking is recommended and a


recalibration might be necessary after several months depending of the conditions of use.

To recalibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Take a turbidity standard (formazine for example) representative of the measuring range

- Do a manual measurement on this standard using the check screen (as describe above).

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen and then enter the standard value on the
keypad.

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 272 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.20 Turbidity by UV absorption with spectrograph

4.20.1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the light absorption to the Beer-Lambert law:

[C ] = k ⋅ log I 0 
 I1 

With [C ] : Sample concentration


k: Absorption coefficient (molecule specific)
I0: Light intensity before the sample
I1 : Light intensity after of the sample

The light is generated by a pulsed xenon lamp to reach an ultra long life time.
The absorption spectrum is performed by a concave grating coupled to a 2048 pixels CCD
(Charge-Coupled Device).

1 Xenon flash lamp


2 Sample flow cell
3 Spectrograph with concave grating and CCD detector

Release A Page 273 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.20.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration or error code corresponds to the
last measurement done, as well as the signal and absorbance graphs.

7 1 6 8 9 10 11

2
18
12 27
19
13 24
20
14
21

15

16

17 22 23 25 26

Release A Page 274 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 275 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Measuring cycle steps display

During a measuring cycle or a zeroing cycle, this area displays a counter of the elemental
acquisitions preceded by the message “measuring…” or “zeroing…” respectively.

8 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water inside the flow cell before pressing on this button.

Note: an auto-zero is performed automatically during each acid cleaning if this option is selected
on the timing screen.

9 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

Release A Page 276 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Signal graph

This graph displays the lamp spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is updated during
the measuring cycle when the lamp is flashing.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

To acquire again the lamp signal, press on the “play” button.

With pure water inside the flow cell, the signal must not be saturated (below 2000 mV) on the
two wavelengths bands used for the absorbance calculation defined as “Peak wavelength” and
“Ref wavelength” on the check screen. Otherwise, an error will occur during the measuring
cycle.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 277 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Absorbance spectrum

This graph displays the absorbance spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is displayed
in light grey during a measuring cycle until updated.

For more details or to investigate about the absorbance spectrum, press anywhere on the graph
to zoom it as below:

The average absorbance for the peak wavelength band is represented by a green line and
displayed above the curve.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 278 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

12 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

14 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

15 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

16 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

Release A Page 279 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

17 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 280 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

18 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

19 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

20 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

Release A Page 281 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

21 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

22 Peak wavelength

This field allows changing the peak wavelength taken in account for the measurement. It
corresponds to a wavelength band used to determine the turbidity of the sample.

The default value is 350 nm. It can be changed exceptionally to avoid a known interference.

23 Peak width

This field allows changing the width band of the peak wavelength taken in account for the
measurement.

It may be exceptionally enlarged or reduced to avoid a known.

24 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

25 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

26 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

Release A Page 282 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

27 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

4.20.3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated. However, periodical checking is recommended and a


recalibration might be necessary after several months depending of the conditions of use.

To recalibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Take a turbidity standard (formazine for example) representative of the measuring range

- Do a manual measurement on this standard using the check screen (as describe above).

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen and then enter the standard value on the
keypad.

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 283 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.21 Turbidity by nephelometry with laser diode

4.21.1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on nephelometric method.

The light beam is generated by a pulsed laser diode while the light detection is performed by a
photodiode detector placed at 90° from the light beam as represented below:

1 Laser diode source


2 Sample flow cell
3 Photo detector

Release A Page 284 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.21.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration or error code corresponds to the
last measurement done, while the signal and signal graph are continuously updated.

7 1 6 8 9 10 11

2
18
12 26
19
13 23
20
14
21

15
22

16

17 24 25

Release A Page 285 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 286 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Measuring cycle steps display

During a measuring cycle or a zeroing cycle, this area displays a counter of the elemental
acquisitions preceded by the message “measuring…” or “zeroing…” respectively.

8 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water inside the flow cell before pressing on this button.

Note: an auto-zero is performed automatically during each acid cleaning if this option is selected
on the timing screen.

9 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

Release A Page 287 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Photo detector signal

This window displays the photo detector signal continuously. This signal corresponds to the light
re-emitted by the turbidity of the sample from the laser diode.
On pure water, the signal must normally stay below 100 mV.

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system. It might be due to an over-ranged
sample.

11 Signal graph

This graph displays the light signal re-emitted by the turbidity of the sample from the laser diode.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

Release A Page 288 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The average signal value in mV and its standard deviation (sigma) on the last 500 acquisitions
are displayed on the bottom right of the screen.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows. After reading, restart the
acquisitions by pressing on the “play” button if necessary.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

12 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

14 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

15 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

Release A Page 289 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

16 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

17 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 290 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

18 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

Release A Page 291 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

19 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

20 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

21 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

22 Offset

This field show the internal offset applied on the signal for the zeroing.
It is updated at each zeroing and has not to be changed.
It can be used for troubleshooting by the manufacturer.

23 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

24 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

Release A Page 292 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

25 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

26 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

4.21.3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated. However, periodical checking is recommended and a


recalibration might be necessary after several months depending of the conditions of use.

To recalibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Take a turbidity standard (formazine for example) representative of the measuring range

- Do a manual measurement on this standard using the check screen (as describe above).

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen and then enter the standard value on the
keypad.

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 293 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.22 UV254 by filters

4.22.1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the UV light absorption at 254 nm according to the Beer-
Lambert law:

[C ] = k ⋅ log I 0 
 I1 
With [C ] : Sample concentration
k: Absorption coefficient (molecule specific)
I0: Light intensity before the sample
I1 : Light intensity after of the sample

The UV light is generated by a pulsed xenon lamp to reach an ultra long life time.
The light detection is performed by two photodiode detectors through interferential filters; one
centred on 254 nm while the other is used as reference to compensate the turbidity or deposit
inside the flow cell.

The UV light absorption at 254 nm is generally well correlated with the organic matter contents
on natural water (rivers, lakes) and municipal wastewater as well as wastewater on food and
paper industries.
After checking the correlation and after having introduced the right calibration factor, the
measurements can be displayed as COD measurement, or even BOD or TOC measurement.

1 Xenon flash lamp


2 Sample flow cell
3 Beam splitter
4 Peak interferential filter
5 Peak photo detector
6 Reference interferential filter
7 Reference photo detector

Release A Page 294 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.22.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration or error code corresponds to the
last measurement done, while the signals are continuously updated.

7 1 6 8 9 10 11 12 13

2
21
14 29
22
15 26
23
16
24

17

18

19 20 25 27 28

Release A Page 295 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 296 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Measuring cycle steps display

During a measuring cycle or a zeroing cycle, this area displays a counter of the elemental
acquisitions preceded by the message “measuring…” or “zeroing…” respectively.

8 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water inside the flow cell before pressing on this button.

Note: an auto-zero is performed automatically during each acid cleaning if this option is selected
on the timing screen.

9 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

Release A Page 297 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Photo detector no 1 (PH1) signal

This window displays the photo detector 1 (PH1) signal continuously. This signal corresponds to
the light absorbed by the organic matter.

On pure water, the signal must normally be in a 500 mV to 2000 mV range.

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.

11 Photo detector no 2 (PH2) signal

This window displays the photo detector 2 (PH2) signal continuously. This signal corresponds to
the reference light that is not absorbed by the organic matter. It is use to compensate turbidity or
deposit on the flow cell.

On pure water, the signal must normally be in a 200 mV to 2000 mV range.

When the light signal added to the darkness signal reach 3000 mV, a message “OVL!” in red is
displayed to indicate a saturation of the acquisition system.

Release A Page 298 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

12 Photo detector no 1 Signal graph

This graph displays the PH1 signal continuously updated. This signal corresponds to the light
absorbed by organic matter.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

The average signal value in mV and its standard deviation (sigma) on the last 500 acquisitions
are displayed on the bottom right of the screen.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows. After reading, restart the
acquisitions by pressing on the “play” button if necessary.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 299 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

13 Photo detector 2 signal graph

This graph displays the photo detector no 2 (PH2) signal continuously updated. This signal
corresponds to the reference light through the sample.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it.
Refer to photo detector no 2 signal graph for the zoom display.

14 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

15 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

16 Display mode

This button allows selecting the concentration display mode as Abs/m (default mode) or as COD
if the correlation between UV absorbance and COD has been settled.

If COD is selected, the calibration factor is preset to 0.5 (typical value for river water), the
linearization curve is taken in account and the label is automatically updated to “COD”.
The measurements previously stored in the internal memory will keep their values in Abs/m.

17 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

Release A Page 300 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

18 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

19 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

20 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 301 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

21 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

Release A Page 302 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

22 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

23 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

24 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

25 Offset

This field show the internal offset applied on the signal for the zeroing.
It is updated at each zeroing and has not to be changed.
It can be used for troubleshooting by the manufacturer.

26 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

27 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

Release A Page 303 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

28 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

29 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

4.22.3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated in Abs/m.

As measurements are often given in COD unit, a specific calibration directly on the sample must
be done. The default calibration factor of 0.5 applies only for river water. Municipal wastewater
or industrial wastewater may have a very different factor.

To calibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Take 2 litres of the sample at an expected significant concentration according to the process

- Proceed to a COD laboratory measurement with one litre only of the sample (keep the second
litre on a cold place if the laboratory measurement is not done the same day)

- Use the second litre for the analyser and do at least two measurements on this sample using
the check screen. The last two measurements must be close together with less than 2% of
difference.

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen and then enter the laboratory COD value on
the keypad.

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen. This new calibration factor will be
taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 304 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.23 UV254 by spectrograph

4.23.1 Principle

The measuring principle is based on the UV light absorption at 254 nm according to the Beer-
Lambert law:

[C ] = k ⋅ log I 0 
 I1 

With [C ] : Sample concentration


k: Absorption coefficient (molecule specific)
I0: Light intensity before the sample
I1 : Light intensity after of the sample

The UV light is generated by a pulsed xenon lamp to reach an ultra long life time.
The absorption spectrum is performed by a concave grating coupled to a 2048 pixels CCD
(Charge-Coupled Device).

A double-wavelength algorithm allows compensating the turbidity or a deposit inside the flow
cell.

The UV light absorption at 254 nm is generally well correlated with the organic matter contents
on natural water (rivers, lakes) and municipal wastewater as well as wastewater on food and
paper industries.

After checking the correlation and after having introduced the right calibration factor, the
measurements can be displayed as COD measurement, or even BOD or TOC measurement.

1 Xenon flash lamp


2 Sample flow cell
3 Spectrograph with concave grating and CCD detector

Release A Page 305 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.23.2 Test

From the process screen, press on the “tools” icon and then on the channel to test, or directly to
the channel area as a shortcut.

If you are logged in user mode, the parameters are masked. You must be logged in
administrator mode to access to the parameters (default password is 456).

The check screen as below is displayed. The concentration or error code corresponds to the
last measurement done, as well as the signal and absorbance graphs.

7 1 6 8 9 10 11

2
19
12 30
20
13 27
21
14
22

15

16

17 18 23 24 25 26 28 29

Release A Page 306 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

1 Measurement window

This window displays the last measured value (or the error code in case of error, refer to
troubleshooting section) with proper label and unit.

During a measuring cycle, the last measured value is display in light green until replaced by the
new value in black.

The number of decimal can be adjusted, refer to the field below.

2 Start button

Pressing on this button starts a manual measuring cycle. It can be aborted at any time by
pressing on the stop button. At the end of the cycle, a new value will be displayed on the
measurement window.

The process value on the process screen will not be updated by this measurement to avoid any
interference with the plant supervisor system, same concerning the MODBUS channel’s value,
4-20 mA output and alarm relays (if any).

3 Stop button

Pressing on this button stop and aborts any engaged measuring cycle. It can also be used to
stop the sampling pump or the cleaning pump.

4 Sampling pump button

Pressing on this button starts the sampling pump. The pump will stop automatically after 10
seconds. It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

5 Cleaning pump button

Pressing on this button starts the cleaning pump. The pump will stop automatically after the
time defined in the acid “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

Release A Page 307 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Ultrasonic cleaning button

Pressing on this button starts the ultrasonic cleaning. The cleaning will stop automatically after
the time defined in the ultrasonic “cleaning time” field of the timing screen.
It can also be stopped at any time by pressing on the stop button.

Note: this button is deactivated during a measuring cycle.

7 Measuring cycle steps display

During a measuring cycle or a zeroing cycle, this area displays a counter of the elemental
acquisitions preceded by the message “measuring…” or “zeroing…” respectively.

8 Zero button

This button is used for zeroing the measurement.

Put first pure water inside the flow cell before pressing on this button.

Note: an auto-zero is performed automatically during each acid cleaning if this option is selected
on the timing screen.

9 Scale button

This button is used to calibrate the analyser on a standard solution.

To avoid a wrong calibration, check the zero or redo a zero before doing a
calibration.

A new calibration factor is calculated after entering the standard value.


The calibration history will be updated with the time and date of the calibration attached to the
new calibration factor.

For more details, refer to the “recalibration” section.

Release A Page 308 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

10 Signal graph

This graph displays the lamp spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is updated during
the measuring cycle when the lamp is flashing.

For more details or to investigate about the signal, press anywhere on the graph to zoom it as
below:

To acquire again the lamp signal, press on the “play” button.

With pure water inside the flow cell, the signal must not be saturated (below 2000 mV) on the
two wavelengths bands used for the absorbance calculation defined as “Peak wavelength” and
“Ref wavelength” on the check screen. Otherwise, an error will occur during the measuring
cycle.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 309 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

11 Absorbance spectrum

This graph displays the absorbance spectrum get during the last measuring cycle. It is displayed
in light grey during a measuring cycle until updated.

For more details or to investigate about the absorbance spectrum, press anywhere on the graph
to zoom it as below:

The average absorbance for the peak wavelength band and for the reference wavelength band
are represented by a green line and displayed above the curve.

The difference is used to calculate the final concentration.

The values can be read by moving the cursor with the vertical arrows.

If necessary, use the horizontal arrows to displace the graph or press on the graph to zoom it.
The Y scale is automatic but may be override by the small arrows placed above the Y axis.

Release A Page 310 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

12 Label

This field allows changing the channel label displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

13 Unit

This field allows changing the channel unit displayed with the measurement. The label size is
limited to 6 characters.

14 Display mode

This button allows selecting the concentration display mode as Abs/m (default mode) or as COD
if the correlation between UV absorbance and COD has been settled.

If COD is selected, the calibration factor is preset to 0.5 (typical value for river water), the
linearization curve is taken in account and the label is automatically updated to “COD”.
The measurements previously stored in the internal memory will keep their values in Abs/m.

15 Negative values displayed

Negatives values are possible for most of the measurements as they result of normal
fluctuations if the measurement is close to zero.

By default, the display of negative values is allowed as negative values may also result from a
wrong zero and consequently it may be useful to be aware of such problem when seeing
strongly negative values.

But as negative values have no theoretical meaning, it’s possible to replace them by zero by
deselecting this function.

16 Number of decimals

This field allows changing the number of decimal displayed for the measurement value to
remove not significant decimals.

Note: this choice does not affect the measurements stored in the internal memory.

Release A Page 311 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

17 Number of averaging

The measurement as displayed on the process screen (or read under MODBUS protocol or
available on the 4-20 mA output) can be formed by the average over a number of basic
measurements defined by the field.
It can be useful to improve the repeatability of the measurements if the response time is not
critical.

By default, no averaging is performed and this field contains a value of 1.

18 4-20 mA output

This button indicates if a 4-20 mA output has been installed or not for this channel (option).

If a module has been installed, its position is displayed on the right. Pressing on this button
shows the popup below that enable to test the 4-20 mA output by pressing on the “test” button.

Release A Page 312 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The current value of the 4-20 mA output is displayed on the top, based on the last process
measurement (but not on the test measurement to avoid disturbances on the process
supervisor system).

The “scan” key allows scanning the 4-20 mA output mA by mA for testing purpose only.

The scale value for 20 mA and 4 mA are displayed below. These preset values can be changed
by pressing on these fields.

If the output value doesn’t mach exactly with the theoretical value, it’s possible to calibrate the
output by pressing on the “calibration” key. Then real values for 4 and 20 mA must be entered.

Note: position M12 is not available for the 4-20 mA output modules.

19 Calibration factor

This field allows changing the calibration factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally changed automatically while doing a calibration by pressing on the
“scale” button and then recorded in the calibration history. This multiplying factor is taken in
account as the last step before displaying the measurement value.

Note: this factor must be set to 1.0 before doing a new linearization curve

Release A Page 313 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

20 Scale factor

This field allows changing the scale factor of the channel.


Precautions must be taken before changing this value.

This factor is normally determined in factory to transform the basic measurement to a scaled
value in the final unit, mg/l for example.
It is has no reason to be changed except if internal elements are replaced.

21 Number of readings

This field allows changing the number of basic readings averaged to obtain one final
measurement.

Increasing this value improve the repeatability but increase also the measuring time.
Depending on the application, it can be exceptionally increased or decreased.

22 Minimum signal

This field fix the minimum light signal value over the wavelength range taken in account for the
measurement. An error will be displayed if the signal over the wavelength range is lower than
this value.

23 Peak wavelength

This field allows changing the peak wavelength taken in account for the measurement. It
corresponds to a wavelength absorbed by organic matter.

The default value is 254 nm. It can be changed exceptionally to avoid a known interference or to
improve the COD correlation if a study has been carry on previously.

24 Peak width

This field allows changing the width band of the peak wavelength taken in account for the
measurement.

It may be exceptionally enlarged or reduced to avoid a known interference or to improve the


COD correlation.

Release A Page 314 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

25 Reference wavelength

This field allows changing the reference wavelength taken in account for the measurement.
It corresponds normally to a wavelength where the organic matter doesn’t absorb.

The default value is 350 nm. It can be changed exceptionally to avoid a known interference or to
improve the COD correlation if a study has been carry on previously.

26 Reference width

This field allows changing the width band of the reference wavelength taken in account for the
measurement.

It may be exceptionally enlarged or reduced to avoid a known interference or to improve the


COD correlation.

27 Last calibration window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

28 Last zero window

This window displays the 10 last calibrations done with the date, time and new calibration factor.

29 Linearity graph and values

This area concerns the linearity compensation applied on the rough measurements.

The Beer-Lambert law used on most of the measurements is not linear for high concentrations
due to a light mask effect. Therefore it’s necessary to introduce a correction before displaying
the final concentration. This correction is based on the linearity curve represented on the top.

The Y-axis corresponds to the rough measurements entered on the M1 to M10 fields while the
X-axis corresponds to the standard or final measurement, entered on the S1 to S10 fields.

Release A Page 315 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

The M1-M10 and S1-S10 values must be strictly increasing. It’s highly recommended to put 0.0
and 0.0 as starting values for S1 and M1. The final value is linearly extrapolated between these
points.

27 Linearity ON/OFF

This button allows deactivating temporary the linearity curve (OFF), for example to redo a new
linearity curve.
The linearity curve is automatically reactivated (ON) when leaving the check screen.

Release A Page 316 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

4.23.3 Recalibration

The analyser is factory calibrated in Abs/m.

As measurements are often given in COD unit, a specific calibration directly on the sample must
be done. The default calibration factor of 0.5 applies only for river water. Municipal wastewater
or industrial wastewater may have a very different factor.

To calibrate the analyser, proceed as follow:

- Take 2 litres of the sample at an expected significant concentration according to the process

- Proceed to a COD laboratory measurement with one litre only of the sample (keep the second
litre on a cold place if the laboratory measurement is not done the same day)

- Use the second litre for the analyser and do at least two measurements on this sample using
the check screen. The last two measurements must be close together with less than 2% of
difference.

- Press on the “scale” button of the check screen and then enter the laboratory COD value on
the keypad.

The calibration is finished. A new calibration factor has been calculated and has been recorded
inside the calibration history displayed on the check screen.

This new calibration factor will be taken in account for all the further measurements.

Release A Page 317 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5 Maintenance and troubleshooting


5.1 General

The maintenance is limited to the replacement of the peristaltic pump tubing and to the refilling
of the cleaning or reagent solution, depending on the configuration.

The period of replacement of the pump tubing depends on the use. A weekly checking is
recommended. The typical lifetime with Pharmed® tubing is estimated to about 1000 hours of
continuous operation.

General troubleshooting:

Disconnect the power cord before servicing!

Symptoms Checking / Origin

The screen remains totally black after - Check the power socket
connecting the power cord.
- Check J1 connector (mains input, high voltage!)
AND
- Check J2 connector on the DSP500 (mains input
The red LED D1 on the DSP500 board is for the power supply, high voltage!)
OFF.
- Check J3 connector (24V output from the power
supply)

- Failure on the power supply of the DSP500 board

The screen remains totally black after


connecting the power cord.
- Check the backlight connector of the screen J10.
AND
- Failure off the DSP500 board.
The red LED D1 on the DSP500 board is
ON.

The screen is lighted but nothing is - Check the screen connector J8 on the rear of the
displayed. DSP500 board

- Failure off the DSP500 board.

Release A Page 318 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.2 Ammonia

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 10% NaOH solution and the 5% H2SO4 cleaning
solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- No NaOH (check NaOH tank, peristaltic pump, tubes and fittings).

- Bad temperature compensation (check the displayed temperature of


the sample).

- Check the display unit: NH4 or N of NH4.

- Condensation inside the gas flow cell (no trace of water must be
visible on the gas circuit)

- Check the instrument with a standard.

Value is too high - Check the display unit: NH4 or N of NH4.

- Bad temperature compensation (check the displayed temperature of


the sample).

- Check the instrument with a standard.

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the optical parts (lens and/or windows), check the
light level at 210 nm (zoom on the signal graph of the check screen)

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 319 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 The temperature of the - Wait about 15 minutes after power on. The temperature is
heated parts is lower displayed on the bottom line of the screen
than 5 °C of the set
point - Check the temperature probe connection on J19 “PT100-3”
of the DSP500 board (no connection gives a temperature of
about -273 °C)

- Check the heater connection on J13 “POWER3” of the


DSP500 board, warning High voltage!

- Failure on the heater (replace)

2 No signal from the - Check the spectrograph connection on J20 of the DSP500
spectrograph board

- Failure on the spectrograph cable (replace)

- Failure on the spectrograph board (replace)

3 The light level on the - Check the light level (zoom on the signal graph of the check
spectrograph is too screen), the light level can be slightly adjusted by moving the
high on the lamp holder or the flow cell
wavelengths used for
the measurement - Failure on the CCD500 board (replace)

4 The light level on the - Water inside the gas flow cell (dismount and dry all the gas
spectrograph is too low circuit, check that there is no clogging on the outlet)
on the wavelengths
used for the - Failure on the xenon lamp circuit if no flashes are visible
measurement during the measurement, check the connection of the
XENON500 board on J26 “XENON1” of the DSP500 board
(the orange neon lamp on the XENON500 board must always
be on, if not replace the XENON500 board) and check the
lamp connection on the XENON500 board (J2)

Release A Page 320 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.3 Chlorophyll A

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 5% H2SO4 cleaning solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero or auto-zero: the cleaning solution has been prepared with
polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

Value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- Bubbles in the sample (check peristaltic pump inlet fitting).

- Bad zero or auto-zero: cleaning solution has been prepared with


polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- Bad calibration: check or redo calibration.

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the flow cell, check the light level on the check
screen

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 321 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 No signal from the - Check the photomultiplier connection on one of the position
photomultiplier J30 to J34 (“LED1” to “LED5”) of the DSP500 board according
to the position displayed on the factory screen

- Failure on the photomultiplier cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photomultiplier board (replace)

2 No signal from the - Check the photo detector connection on one of the position
photo detector J21 to J25 (“IN1” to “IN5”) of the DSP500 board according to
the position displayed on the factory screen

- Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

3 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the water
photomultiplier is too
high - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
the fittings

- Failure on the photomultiplier cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photomultiplier board (replace)

4 The light level - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
coming from the the fittings
reference photo
detector is too high - Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

5 Reserved

6 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the water
reference photo
detector is too low - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

Release A Page 322 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.4 Colour by LED

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 5% H2SO4 cleaning solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero or auto-zero: the cleaning solution has been prepared with
polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

Value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- Bubbles in the sample (check peristaltic pump inlet fitting).

- Bad zero or auto-zero: cleaning solution has been prepared with


polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- Bad calibration: check or redo calibration.

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the flow cell, check the light level on the check
screen

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 323 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 No signal from the - Check the photo detector connection on one of the position
photo detector J21 to J25 (“IN1” to “IN5”) of the DSP500 board according to
the position defined on the check screen in the position box

- Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

2 Reserved

3 The light level - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
coming from the peak the fittings
LED is too high
- Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

4 The light level - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
coming from the the fittings
reference LED is too
high - Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

5 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the peak water
LED is too low
- Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Failure on the peak LED board cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the peak LED board (replace)

6 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the water
reference LED is too
low - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Failure on the reference LED board cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the reference LED board (replace)

7 The temperature - Failure on the peak LED board cable (repair or replace)
compensation signal
of the peak LED is - Failure on the peak LED board (replace)

Release A Page 324 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

invalid

8 The temperature - Failure on the reference LED board cable (repair or replace)
compensation signal
of the reference LED - Failure on the reference LED board (replace)
is invalid

Release A Page 325 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.5 Colour by spectrograph

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 5% H2SO4 cleaning solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero or auto-zero: the cleaning solution has been prepared with
polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

Value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- Bubbles in the sample (check peristaltic pump inlet fitting).

- Bad zero or auto-zero: cleaning solution has been prepared with


polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure)

- Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the flow cell, check the light level on the check
screen

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 326 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 reserved

2 No signal from the - Check the spectrograph connection on the connector J20 of
spectrograph the DSP500 board

- Failure on the spectrograph cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the spectrograph board (replace)

3 The light level on the - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
used bands of the fittings
wavelengths is too
high - Failure on the spectrograph cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the spectrograph board (replace)

4 The light level on the - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
used bands of water
wavelengths is too
low - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Deposit or dirty on the flow cell

- Failure on the xenon lamp circuit if no flashes are visible


during the measurement, check the connection of the
XENON500 board on J27 “XENON2” of the DSP500 board (the
orange neon lamp on the XENON500 board must always be
on, if not replace the XENON500 board) and check the lamp
connection on the XENON500 board (J2)

Release A Page 327 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.6 Conductivity

Maintenance

The conductivity probe must be cleaned on a regular base (at least weekly) depending of the
application.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero

Value is too low - No water in contact with the electrodes

- Dirty on the electrodes

- Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Unstable value - Electrical interference on the probe cable, put the probe cable away
from power cables

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 Over range - Check on pure water

- Failure on the conductivity board (replace)

Release A Page 328 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.7 Dissolved oxygen

Maintenance

The dissolved oxygen probe must be cleaned on a regular base (at least weekly) depending of
the application.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero

Value is too low - Dirty on the probe

- Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration

Value is too high - No water in contact with the probe

- Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

Reserved

Release A Page 329 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.8 Hydrocarbons

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 5% H2SO4 cleaning solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero or auto-zero: the cleaning solution has been prepared with
polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

Value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- Bubbles in the sample (check peristaltic pump inlet fitting).

- Bad zero or auto-zero: cleaning solution has been prepared with


polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- Bad calibration: check or redo calibration.

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the flow cell, check the light level on the check
screen

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 330 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 No signal from the - Check the photomultiplier connection on one of the position
photomultiplier J30 to J34 (“LED1” to “LED5”) of the DSP500 board according
to the position displayed on the factory screen

- Failure on the photomultiplier cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photomultiplier board (replace)

2 No signal from the - Check the photo detector connection on one of the position
photo detector J21 to J25 (“IN1” to “IN5”) of the DSP500 board according to
the position displayed on the factory screen

- Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

3 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the water
photomultiplier is too
high - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
the fittings

- Failure on the photomultiplier cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photomultiplier board (replace)

4 The light level - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
coming from the the fittings
reference photo
detector is too high - Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

5 Reserved

6 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the water
reference photo
detector is too low - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

Release A Page 331 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.9 Hydrogen sulphide

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 10% HCl solution and the 5% H2SO4 cleaning
solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- No HCl (check HCl tank, peristaltic pump, tubes and fittings).

- Bad temperature compensation (check the displayed temperature of


the sample).

- Check the display unit: H2S or S of H2S.

- Condensation inside the gas flow cell (no trace of water must be
visible on the gas circuit)

- Check the instrument with a standard.

Value is too high - Check the display unit: H2S or S of H2S.

- Bad temperature compensation (check the displayed temperature of


the sample).

- Check the instrument with a standard.

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the optical parts (lens and/or windows), check the
light level at 210 nm (zoom on the signal graph of the check screen)

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 332 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 The temperature of the - Wait about 15 minutes after power on. The temperature is
heated parts is lower displayed on the bottom line of the screen
than 5 °C of the set
point - Check the temperature probe connection on J19 “PT100-3”
of the DSP500 board (no connection gives a temperature of
about -273 °C)

- Check the heater connected on J13 “POWER3” of the


DSP500 board, warning High voltage!

- Failure on the heater (replace)

2 No signal from the - Check the spectrograph connection on J20 of the DSP500
spectrograph board

- Failure on the spectrograph cable (replace)

- Failure on the spectrograph board (replace)

3 The light level on the - Check the light level (zoom on the signal graph of the check
spectrograph is too screen), the light level can be slightly adjusted by moving the
high on the lamp holder or the flow cell
wavelengths used for
the measurement - Failure on the CCD500 board (replace)

4 The light level on the - Water inside the gas flow cell (dismount and dry all the gas
spectrograph is too low circuit, check that there is no clogging on the outlet)
on the wavelengths
used for the - Failure on the xenon lamp circuit if no flashes are visible
measurement during the measurement, check the connection of the
XENON500 board on J26 “XENON1” of the DSP500 board
(the orange neon lamp on the XENON500 board must always
be on, if not replace the XENON500 board) and check the
lamp connection on the XENON500 board (J2)

Release A Page 333 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.10 Input 4-20 mA

Maintenance

No maintenance is required.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero a value below 4 mA

Value is too low - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

Reserved

Release A Page 334 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.11 Nitrate by filter

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 5% H2SO4 cleaning solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero or auto-zero: the cleaning solution has been prepared with
polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

Value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- Bubbles in the sample (check peristaltic pump inlet fitting).

- Bad zero or auto-zero: cleaning solution has been prepared with


polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure)

- Check the mode NO3 or N-NO3

- Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

- Check the mode NO3 or N-NO3

- Interferences in the sample

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the flow cell, check the light level on the check
screen

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 335 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 No signal from the - Check the photo detector connection on one of the position
peak photo detector J21 to J25 (“IN1” to “IN5”) of the DSP500 board according to
the position defined on the check screen in the position box

- Failure on the peak photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the peak photo detector board (replace)

2 No signal from the - Check the photo detector connection on one of the position
reference photo J21 to J25 (“IN1” to “IN5”) of the DSP500 board according to
detector the position defined on the check screen in the position box

- Failure on the reference photo detector cable (repair or


replace)

- Failure on the reference photo detector board (replace)

3 The light level - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
coming from the peak the fittings
photo detector is too
high - Failure on the peak photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the peak photo detector board (replace)

4 The light level - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
coming from the the fittings
reference photo
detector is too high - Failure on the reference photo detector cable (repair or
replace)

- Failure on the reference photo detector board (replace)

5 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the peak water
photo detector is too
low - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Failure on the peak photo detector board cable (repair or


replace)

- Failure on the peak photo detector board (replace)

6 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the water

Release A Page 336 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

reference photo - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water
detector is too low
- Failure on the reference photo detector board cable (repair or
replace)

- Failure on the reference photo detector board (replace)

Release A Page 337 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.12 Nitrate by spectrograph

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 5% H2SO4 cleaning solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero or auto-zero: the cleaning solution has been prepared with
polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

Value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- Bubbles in the sample (check peristaltic pump inlet fitting).

- Bad zero or auto-zero: cleaning solution has been prepared with


polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure)

- Check the mode NO3 or N-NO3

- Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

- Check the mode NO3 or N-NO3

- Interferences in the sample

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the flow cell, check the light level on the check
screen

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 338 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 reserved

2 No signal from the - Check the spectrograph connection on the connector J20 of
spectrograph the DSP500 board

- Failure on the spectrograph cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the spectrograph board (replace)

3 The light level on the - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
used bands of the fittings
wavelengths is too
high - Failure on the spectrograph cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the spectrograph board (replace)

4 The light level on the - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
used bands of water
wavelengths is too
low - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Deposit or dirty on the flow cell

- Failure on the xenon lamp circuit if no flashes are visible


during the measurement, check the connection of the
XENON500 board on J27 “XENON2” of the DSP500 board (the
orange neon lamp on the XENON500 board must always be
on, if not replace the XENON500 board) and check the lamp
connection on the XENON500 board (J2)

Release A Page 339 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.13 Oxidation-reduction potential

Maintenance

The ORP probe must be cleaned on a regular base (at least weekly) depending of the
application.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad calibration

- ORP probe disconnected

Value is too low - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Unstable value - Electrical interference on the probe cable, put the probe cable away
from power cables

- Dirty on the electrode

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 Over range - Probe disconnected

- Failure on the pH-ORP board (replace)

Release A Page 340 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.14 pH

Maintenance

The pH probe must be cleaned on a regular base (at least weekly) depending of the application.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad calibration

- pH probe disconnected

Value is too low - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Unstable value - Electrical interference on the probe cable, put the probe cable away
from power cables

- Dirty on the electrode

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 Over range - Probe disconnected

- Failure on the pH board (replace)

Release A Page 341 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.15 Phosphate by LED

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the one or two reagent bottles and the 5% H2SO4
cleaning solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Very high turbidity on the sample that is not totally compensated

Value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- No reagent or fault in the reagent injection (pump failure, check-valve


clogged)

- Interference in the sample

- Bad calibration: check or redo calibration.

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

- Interference in the sample

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the flow cell, check the light level on the check
screen

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 342 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 No signal from the - Check the photo detector connection on one of the position
photo detector J21 to J25 (“IN1” to “IN5”) of the DSP500 board according to
the position defined on the check screen in the position box

- Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

2 Reserved

3 The light level - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
coming from the peak the fittings
LED is too high
- Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

4 The light level - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
coming from the the fittings
reference LED is too
high - Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

5 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the peak water
LED is too low
- Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Failure on the peak LED board cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the peak LED board (replace)

6 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the water
reference LED is too
low - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Failure on the reference LED board cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the reference LED board (replace)

7 The temperature - Failure on the peak LED board cable (repair or replace)
compensation signal
of the peak LED is - Failure on the peak LED board (replace)

Release A Page 343 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

invalid

8 The temperature - Failure on the reference LED board cable (repair or replace)
compensation signal
of the reference LED - Failure on the reference LED board (replace)
is invalid

9 Alarm for no reagent - Refill the reagent tank

- Check the level detector connection

Release A Page 344 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.16 Phosphate by spectrograph

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the one or two reagent bottles and the 5% H2SO4
cleaning solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Very high turbidity on the sample that is not totally compensated

Value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- No reagent or fault in the reagent injection (pump failure, check-valve


clogged)

- Interference in the sample

- Bad calibration: check or redo calibration.

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

- Interference in the sample

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the flow cell, check the light level on the check
screen

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 345 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 reserved

2 No signal from the - Check the spectrograph connection on the connector J20 of
spectrograph the DSP500 board

- Failure on the spectrograph cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the spectrograph board (replace)

3 The light level on the - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
used bands of the fittings
wavelengths is too
high - Failure on the spectrograph cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the spectrograph board (replace)

4 The light level on the - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
used bands of water
wavelengths is too
low - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Deposit or dirty on the flow cell

- Failure on the xenon lamp circuit if no flashes are visible


during the measurement, check the connection of the
XENON500 board on J27 “XENON2” of the DSP500 board (the
orange neon lamp on the XENON500 board must always be
on, if not replace the XENON500 board) and check the lamp
connection on the XENON500 board (J2)

9 Alarm for no reagent - Refill the reagent tank

- Check the level detector connection

Release A Page 346 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.17 Rhodamine

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 5% H2SO4 cleaning solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero or auto-zero: the cleaning solution has been prepared with
polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

Value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- Bubbles in the sample (check peristaltic pump inlet fitting).

- Bad zero or auto-zero: cleaning solution has been prepared with


polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- Bad calibration: check or redo calibration.

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the flow cell, check the light level on the check
screen

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 347 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 No signal from the - Check the photomultiplier connection on one of the position
photomultiplier J30 to J34 (“LED1” to “LED5”) of the DSP500 board according
to the position displayed on the factory screen

- Failure on the photomultiplier cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photomultiplier board (replace)

2 No signal from the - Check the photo detector connection on one of the position
photo detector J21 to J25 (“IN1” to “IN5”) of the DSP500 board according to
the position displayed on the factory screen

- Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

3 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the water
photomultiplier is too
high - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
the fittings

- Failure on the photomultiplier cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photomultiplier board (replace)

4 The light level - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
coming from the the fittings
reference photo
detector is too high - Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

5 Reserved

6 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the water
reference photo
detector is too low - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

Release A Page 348 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.18 Spectrum UV-VIS

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 5% H2SO4 cleaning solution.

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 reserved

2 No signal from the - Check the spectrograph connection on the connector J20 of
spectrograph the DSP500 board

- Failure on the spectrograph cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the spectrograph board (replace)

3 The light level on - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
some wavelengths is the fittings
too high
- Failure on the spectrograph cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the spectrograph board (replace)

4 The light level on - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
some wavelengths is water
too low
- Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Deposit or dirty on the flow cell

- Failure on the xenon lamp circuit if no flashes are visible


during the measurement, check the connection of the
XENON500 board on J27 “XENON2” of the DSP500 board (the
orange neon lamp on the XENON500 board must always be
on, if not replace the XENON500 board) and check the lamp
connection on the XENON500 board (J2)

Release A Page 349 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.19 Temperature

Maintenance

No maintenance is required.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Value is too low - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 Probe disconnected - Check the connection of the temperature probe

- Failure on the temperature module (replace)

2 Probe short-circuited - Check the probe with an ohmmeter, the value must be in a
100 to 120 ohm range, if not replace the probe

- Failure on the temperature module (replace)

Release A Page 350 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.20 Turbidity by UV absorption with filter

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 5% H2SO4 cleaning solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero or auto-zero: the cleaning solution has been prepared with
polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

Value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- Bubbles in the sample (check peristaltic pump inlet fitting).

- Bad zero or auto-zero: cleaning solution has been prepared with


polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure)

- Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the flow cell, check the light level on the check
screen

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 351 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 No signal from the - Check the photo detector connection on one of the position
peak photo detector J21 to J25 (“IN1” to “IN5”) of the DSP500 board according to
the position defined on the check screen in the position box

- Failure on the peak photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the peak photo detector board (replace)

2 No signal from the - Check the photo detector connection on one of the position
reference photo J21 to J25 (“IN1” to “IN5”) of the DSP500 board according to
detector the position defined on the check screen in the position box

- Failure on the reference photo detector cable (repair or


replace)

- Failure on the reference photo detector board (replace)

3 The light level - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
coming from the peak the fittings
photo detector is too
high - Failure on the peak photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the peak photo detector board (replace)

4 The light level - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
coming from the the fittings
reference photo
detector is too high - Failure on the reference photo detector cable (repair or
replace)

- Failure on the reference photo detector board (replace)

5 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the peak water
photo detector is too
low - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Failure on the peak photo detector board cable (repair or


replace)

- Failure on the peak photo detector board (replace)

6 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the water

Release A Page 352 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

reference photo - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water
detector is too low
- Failure on the reference photo detector board cable (repair or
replace)

- Failure on the reference photo detector board (replace)

Release A Page 353 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.21 Turbidity by UV absorption with spectrograph

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 5% H2SO4 cleaning solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero or auto-zero: the cleaning solution has been prepared with
polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

Value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- Bubbles in the sample (check peristaltic pump inlet fitting).

- Bad zero or auto-zero: cleaning solution has been prepared with


polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure)

- Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the flow cell, check the light level on the check
screen

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 354 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 reserved

2 No signal from the - Check the spectrograph connection on the connector J20 of
spectrograph the DSP500 board

- Failure on the spectrograph cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the spectrograph board (replace)

3 The light level on the - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
used bands of the fittings
wavelengths is too
high - Failure on the spectrograph cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the spectrograph board (replace)

4 The light level on the - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
used bands of water
wavelengths is too
low - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Deposit or dirty on the flow cell

- Failure on the xenon lamp circuit if no flashes are visible


during the measurement, check the connection of the
XENON500 board on J27 “XENON2” of the DSP500 board (the
orange neon lamp on the XENON500 board must always be
on, if not replace the XENON500 board) and check the lamp
connection on the XENON500 board (J2)

Release A Page 355 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.22 Turbidity by nephelometry

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 5% H2SO4 cleaning solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero or auto-zero: the cleaning solution has been prepared with
polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure)

Value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- Bad zero or auto-zero: cleaning solution has been prepared with


polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure)

- Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration

Value is too high - Bubbles in the sample (check peristaltic pump inlet fitting).

- Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the flow cell, check the light level on the check
screen

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 356 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 No signal from the - Check the photo detector connection on one of the position
peak photo detector J21 to J25 (“IN1” to “IN5”) of the DSP500 board according to
the position displayed on the factory screen

- Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

2 The light level - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
coming from the peak the fittings
photo detector is too
high - Failure on the photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the photo detector board (replace)

3 No reference light - Check the LED connection on one of the position J30 to J34
from the laser diode (“LED1” to “LED5”) of the DSP500 board according to the
board position displayed on the factory screen

- Failure on the laser diode cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the laser diode board (replace)

Release A Page 357 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.23 UV254 by filter

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 5% H2SO4 cleaning solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero or auto-zero: the cleaning solution has been prepared with
polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

Value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- Bubbles in the sample (check peristaltic pump inlet fitting).

- Bad zero or auto-zero: cleaning solution has been prepared with


polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure)

- Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the flow cell, check the light level on the check
screen

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 358 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 No signal from the - Check the photo detector connection on one of the position
peak photo detector J21 to J25 (“IN1” to “IN5”) of the DSP500 board according to
the position defined on the check screen in the position box

- Failure on the peak photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the peak photo detector board (replace)

2 No signal from the - Check the photo detector connection on one of the position
reference photo J21 to J25 (“IN1” to “IN5”) of the DSP500 board according to
detector the position defined on the check screen in the position box

- Failure on the reference photo detector cable (repair or


replace)

- Failure on the reference photo detector board (replace)

3 The light level - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
coming from the peak the fittings
photo detector is too
high - Failure on the peak photo detector cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the peak photo detector board (replace)

4 The light level - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
coming from the the fittings
reference photo
detector is too high - Failure on the reference photo detector cable (repair or
replace)

- Failure on the reference photo detector board (replace)

5 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the peak water
photo detector is too
low - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Failure on the peak photo detector board cable (repair or


replace)

- Failure on the peak photo detector board (replace)

6 The light level - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
coming from the water

Release A Page 359 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

reference photo - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water
detector is too low
- Failure on the reference photo detector board cable (repair or
replace)

- Failure on the reference photo detector board (replace)

Release A Page 360 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

5.24 UV254 by spectrograph

Maintenance

The maintenance is limited to refilling of the 5% H2SO4 cleaning solution.

Troubleshooting

Symptoms Origin

Negative value - Bad zero or auto-zero: the cleaning solution has been prepared with
polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure).

- No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

Value is too low - No water in the flow cell (clogging, bad inlet connection, fault in the
peristaltic pump)

- Bubbles in the sample (check peristaltic pump inlet fitting).

- Bad zero or auto-zero: cleaning solution has been prepared with


polluted water or fault in the acid cleaning system (no flow, pump
failure)

- Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration

Value is too high - Bad calibration: check or redo a calibration.

Unstable value - Deposit or dirty on the flow cell, check the light level on the check
screen

- Moving optical part (check manually after transportation).

- Bad calibration, check with a standard.

Release A Page 361 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Measuring errors

Error Signification Origin / Remediation


no

1 reserved

2 No signal from the - Check the spectrograph connection on the connector J20 of
spectrograph the DSP500 board

- Failure on the spectrograph cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the spectrograph board (replace)

3 The light level on the - Check that there is no bubble inside the flow cell, if yes check
used bands of the fittings
wavelengths is too
high - Failure on the spectrograph cable (repair or replace)

- Failure on the spectrograph board (replace)

4 The light level on the - Sample concentration over range, check again with pure
used bands of water
wavelengths is too
low - Sample turbidity too high, check again with pure water

- Deposit or dirty on the flow cell

- Failure on the xenon lamp circuit if no flashes are visible


during the measurement, check the connection of the
XENON500 board on J27 “XENON2” of the DSP500 board (the
orange neon lamp on the XENON500 board must always be
on, if not replace the XENON500 board) and check the lamp
connection on the XENON500 board (J2)

Release A Page 362 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6 Specifications
6.1 General

Sample temperature: 0 ºC to 80 ºC, except NH4 or H2S: 0 ºC to 40 ºC

Sample pressure: 5 bar (5000 hPa or 75 psi)

Wet materials: Polypropylene (PP), quartz, glass, PTFE

Sample Inlet/outlet: Double ring fittings for semi-rigid plastic tubing


External diameter (OD) 9.6 mm (3/8”)
Internal diameter (ID) 6.4 mm (1/4”)

Reagent Inlet/outlet: Barbed fittings for soft plastic tubing


Internal diameter (ID) 3.2 to 4 mm

Cleaning solution: Recommended: 5% sulphuric acid (H2SO4)


(optional) (Up to 20% for special applications)
Typical consumption: 100 ml per day

Ultrasonic cleaning: Piezo ceramic 50-70 KHz


(optional) Adjustable time and power

Display: Colour TFT LCD, Size: 10.4”, resolution: 640 x 480 pixels
LED backlight with screen saver
Resistive touch screen

Memory: 4000 records (up to 16 measurement channels) with date and time

Communication: - RS232 - MODBUS protocol or proprietary remote control protocol


- RS485 - MODBUS protocol or proprietary remote control protocol

- Wi-Fi (IEEE 802.11b), optional, SMA connector with antenna


Distance: about 30 meters indoors
MODBUS protocol or proprietary remote control protocol

- Ethernet (10/100BASE-T) optional, RJ45 connector


MODBUS protocol or proprietary remote control protocol

USB port For USB memory keys, any format (FAT16, FAT32)
Standard USB connector type A with IP68 protective cap
- Recorded measurement downloads (compatible with Excel®)
- Complete configuration backup/restore (proprietary format)
- Screen copy in BMP format (compatible with Windows®)

Release A Page 363 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

Outputs: Active 4-20 mA (optional), load 500 ohm maxi, resolution 0.005 mA,
Individual galvanic isolation
Connection on removable screw terminals

Relays: Normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts


Contact rating: 5A @ 277VAC/30VDC resistive
Connection on removable screw terminals

Extensions: 12 internal sockets for input modules (electrodes, 4-20 mA input),


output modules (4-20 mA) or relays modules

Power supply: 90-264 VAC / maxi 100 VA / 50-60Hz

Operating limits: 0 to 50 ºC

Safety standard: IEC 61010-1, EN 61010-1

EMC standard: EN61326/A1/A2/A3, IEC61000-3-2, IEC61000-3-3, IEC61000-4-2,


IEC61000-4-3, IEC61000-4-4, IEC61000-4-5, IEC61000-4-6, IEC61000-4-11

Enclosure: IP65 / Nema 4X, stainless steel 316L with painting

Dimensions: 525 x 345 x 260 mm

Weight: 25 kg approx. (depending of the configuration)

Release A Page 364 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.2 Ammonia

Specifications

Calibrated range: 0 – 50 mg/l NH4+

Measuring range: 0 – 150 mg/l NH4+

Measuring time: 2 to 4 minutes

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At 10 mg/l:
- At 0.5 mg/l:
- Around zero:

Lower detection limit as 3 x sigma:

NaOH concentration: 10% (not critical, 5% to 20% range)

NaOH consumption: 2 ml per measurement

Interferences

No interferences from suspended solid, colour or turbidity

High concentration of solvents or aromatics hydrocarbons may cause a zero offset.


This effect may be compensated by an adjustment of the wavelengths and background factor
on the check screen.

Release A Page 365 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.3 Chlorophyll A

Specifications

Calibrated range:

Measuring range:

Measuring time: 10 seconds

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At full calibrated range:


- At 50% of the calibrated range:
- At 10% of the calibrated range:
- At zero:

Lower detection limit as 3x sigma:

Interferences

High levels of turbidity may decrease the sensitivity

Release A Page 366 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.4 Colour by LED

Specifications

Flow cell 30 mm 10 mm 1 mm
Scale factor
Calibration factor

Calibrated range
Measuring range
Accuracy
Measuring time
Repeatability (sigma): (1,2)
At full calibrated range
At 50% of calibrated range
At 10% of calibrated range
Around zero

Detection limit (3 x sigma)

Note 1: Theses values are typical values, not guaranteed values


Note 2: Theses values are been obtained on clear samples, turbidity may affect theses values

Interferences

No interference

Release A Page 367 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.5 Colour by spectrograph

Specifications

Flow cell 30 mm 10 mm 1 mm
Scale factor
Calibration factor

Calibrated range
Measuring range
Accuracy
Measuring time
Repeatability (sigma): (1,2)
At full calibrated range
At 50% of calibrated range
At 10% of calibrated range
Around zero

Detection limit (3 x sigma)

Note 1: Theses values are typical values, not guaranteed values


Note 2: Theses values are been obtained on clear samples, turbidity may affect theses values

Interferences

No interference

Release A Page 368 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.6 Conductivity

Specifications

Calibrated range: 0 – 1000 µS (for K=1 cell)

Measuring range: 0 – 1000 µS (for K=1 cell)

Measuring time: 2 seconds

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At full calibrated range:


- At 50% of the calibrated range:
- At 10% of the calibrated range:
- At zero:

Lower detection limit as 3x sigma:

Interferences

No known interferences

Release A Page 369 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.7 Dissolved oxygen

Specifications

Calibrated range: 0 – 20 mg/l O2

Measuring range: 0 – 20 mg/l O2

Measuring time: 30 seconds

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At full calibrated range:


- At 50% of the calibrated range:
- At 10% of the calibrated range:
- At zero:

Lower detection limit as 3x sigma:

Interferences

No known interferences

Release A Page 370 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.8 Hydrocarbons

Specifications

Calibrated range: 0 – 10 ppm of phenol

Measuring range: 0 – 10 ppm of phenol

Measuring time: 10 seconds

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At full calibrated range:


- At 50% of the calibrated range:
- At 10% of the calibrated range:
- At zero:

Lower detection limit as 3x sigma:

Interferences

High levels of organic matter or turbidity may decrease the sensitivity

Release A Page 371 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.9 Hydrogen sulphide

Specifications

Calibrated range:

Measuring range:

Measuring time: 2 to 4 minutes

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At full calibrated range:


- At 50% of the calibrated range:
- At 10% of the calibrated range:
- At zero:

Lower detection limit as 3x sigma:

HCl concentration: 10% (not critical, 5% to 20% range)

HCl consumption: 2 ml per measurement

Interferences

No interferences from suspended solid, colour or turbidity

High concentration of solvents or aromatics hydrocarbons may cause an effect.


This effect may be partially compensated by an adjustment of the wavelengths on the check
screen.

Release A Page 372 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.10 Input 4-20 mA

Specifications

Input resistance: 100 ohm

Measuring range: 0 – 20 mA

Measuring time: 2 seconds

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At full calibrated range:


- At zero:

Release A Page 373 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.11 Nitrate by filter

Specifications

Calibrated range: 0 – 100 mg/l NO3

Measuring range: 0 – 150 mg/l NO3

Measuring time: 10 seconds

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At full calibrated range:


- At 50% of the calibrated range:
- At 10% of the calibrated range:
- At zero:

Lower detection limit as 3x sigma:

Interferences

High level of organic matter can interfere.

The measurement is the sum of nitrite (NO2) and nitrate (NO3) ions.

Release A Page 374 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.12 Nitrate by spetrograph

Specifications

Calibrated range: 0 – 100 mg/l NO3

Measuring range: 0 – 150 mg/l NO3

Measuring time: 10 seconds

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At full calibrated range:


- At 50% of the calibrated range:
- At 10% of the calibrated range:
- At zero:

Lower detection limit as 3x sigma:

Interferences

High level of organic matter can interfere.

The measurement is the sum of nitrite (NO2) and nitrate (NO3) ions.

Release A Page 375 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.13 Oxidation-reduction potential

Specifications

Measuring range: -2000 mV to +2000 mV

Measuring time: 2 seconds

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At -2000 mV:
- At zero:
- At +2000 mV:

Interferences

The pH of the solution may interfere

Release A Page 376 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.14 pH

Specifications

Measuring range: 0 to 14

Measuring time: 30 seconds

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At pH 7:

Interferences

Release A Page 377 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.15 Phosphate by LED

Specifications for ascorbic method

Calibrated range: 0 – 2 mg/l P-PO4

Measuring range:

Measuring time: 180 seconds

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At full calibrated range:


- At 50% of the calibrated range:
- At 10% of the calibrated range:
- At zero:

Lower detection limit as 3x sigma:

Interferences

Arsenates, hexavalent chromium and nitrites may interfere.

Release A Page 378 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.16 Phosphate by spectrograph

Specifications for ascorbic method

Calibrated range: 0 – 2 mg/l P-PO4

Measuring range:

Measuring time: 180 seconds

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At full calibrated range:


- At 50% of the calibrated range:
- At 10% of the calibrated range:
- At zero:

Lower detection limit as 3x sigma:

Interferences

Arsenates, hexavalent chromium and nitrites may interfere.

Release A Page 379 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.17 Rhodamine

Specifications

Calibrated range:

Measuring range:

Measuring time: 10 seconds

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At full calibrated range:


- At 50% of the calibrated range:
- At 10% of the calibrated range:
- At zero:

Lower detection limit as 3x sigma:

Interferences

High levels of turbidity may decrease the sensitivity

Release A Page 380 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.18 Spectrum UV-VIS

Specifications

Measuring range: 180 nm – 760 nm

Resolution: 0.3 nm

Measuring time: 10 seconds

Flow cell: 1 to 30 mm (standard sizes: 1, 10, 30 mm)

Repeatability: +/- Abs

Release A Page 381 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.19 Temperature

Specifications

Calibrated range:

Measuring range: 0 - 100°C

Measuring time: 2 seconds

Accuracy: +/- 1 °C

Repeatability as sigma at 25°C:

Release A Page 382 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.20 Turbidity by UV absorption with filter

Specifications

Flow cell
Scale factor
Calibration factor

Calibrated range
Measuring range
Accuracy
Measuring time
Repeatability (sigma): (2,3)
At full calibrated range
At 50% of calibrated range
At 10% of calibrated range
Around zero

Detection limit (3 x sigma)

Note 1: Rough municipal waste water (ww)


Note 2: Theses values are typical values, not guaranteed values
Note 3: Theses values are been obtained on clear samples, turbidity may affect theses values

Interferences

High concentrations of metallic ions may interfere.

Release A Page 383 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.21 Turbidity by UV absorption with spectrograph

Specifications

Flow cell
Scale factor
Calibration factor

Calibrated range
Measuring range
Accuracy
Measuring time
Repeatability (sigma): (2,3)
At full calibrated range
At 50% of calibrated range
At 10% of calibrated range
Around zero

Detection limit (3 x sigma)

Note 1: Rough municipal waste water (ww)


Note 2: Theses values are typical values, not guaranteed values
Note 3: Theses values are been obtained on clear samples, turbidity may affect theses values

Interferences

High concentrations of metallic ions or colour may interfere.


The absorbing wavelength can be modified in the check screen to avoid a specific interference.

Release A Page 384 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.22 Turbidity by nephelometry

Specifications

Calibrated range:

Measuring range:

Measuring time: 10 seconds

Accuracy: +/- 5%

Repeatability as sigma

- At full calibrated range:


- At 50% of the calibrated range:
- At 10% of the calibrated range:
- At zero:

Lower detection limit as 3x sigma:

Interferences

Unknown.

Release A Page 385 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.23 UV254 by filter

Specifications

Flow cell
Mode Abs/m COD river Abs/m COD river Abs/m COD ww(1)
Scale factor
Calibration factor 1.0 0.5 1.0 0.5 1.0 8.0

Calibrated range
Measuring range
Accuracy
Measuring time
Repeatability (sigma): (2,3)
At full calibrated range
At 50% of calibrated range
At 10% of calibrated range
Around zero

Detection limit (3 x sigma)

Note 1: Rough municipal waste water (ww)


Note 2: Theses values are typical values, not guaranteed values
Note 3: Theses values are been obtained on clear samples, turbidity may affect theses values

Interferences

1) Abs/m mode

Possible interference with high concentrations of metallic ions when measuring organic matter

2) COD mode

Each molecule has a specific UV/COD ratio. Display as COD can be done only on solutions
having a relatively constant molecules ratio like river water, municipal waste water, food and
paper industries.
It is recommended to carry out a correlation study before using the analyser in COD mode.

Some molecules like linear hydrocarbons, alcohols and glucose have no UV


absorption and consequently are not detected.

Release A Page 386 of 387


UV500 – Operating manual Tethys Instruments

6.24 UV254 by spectrograph

Specifications

Flow cell
Mode Abs/m COD river Abs/m COD river Abs/m COD ww(1)
Scale factor
Calibration factor 1.0 0.5 1.0 0.5 1.0 8.0

Calibrated range
Measuring range
Accuracy
Measuring time
Repeatability (sigma): (2,3)
At full calibrated range
At 50% of calibrated range
At 10% of calibrated range
Around zero

Detection limit (3 x sigma)

Note 1: Rough municipal waste water (ww)


Note 2: Theses values are typical values, not guaranteed values
Note 3: Theses values are been obtained on clear samples, turbidity may affect theses values

Interferences

1) Abs/m mode

Possible interference with high concentrations of metallic ions when measuring organic matter

2) COD mode

Each molecule has a specific UV/COD ratio. Display as COD can be done only on solutions
having a relatively constant molecules ratio like river water, municipal waste water, food and
paper industries.
It is recommended to carry out a correlation study before using the analyser in COD mode.

Some molecules like linear hydrocarbons, alcohols and glucose have no UV


absorption and consequently are not detected.

---------

Release A Page 387 of 387

Вам также может понравиться